^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) ^ 4^ <^^ 1.0 I.I HI m m m £ u& no !£& HA f 111^ lU ||^ ^ 6" » Photographic ScMices Corporation ^ %^ v \ \ ^. ' V ^-V 33 WIST MAIN STRin WUSTIR,N.Y. I45M (716) •73-4503 v\ '*> CIHM/ICMH Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microraproductions / 'nstitut Canadian da microraproductions historiquas Tachnieal and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquaa at bibliographiquas Th« oo totha Tha Instituta has attamptad to obtain tha bast original copy availabia for filming. Faaturas of this copy which may ba bibliographioally uniqua, which may altar any of tha imagas in tha raproduction, or which may significantly ehanga tha usual mathod of filming, ara chackad balow. □ Colourad covars/ Couvartura da coulaur |~~| Covars damagad/ D D D D Couvartura andommagAa Covars rastorad and/or laminatad/ Couvartura rastaurte at/ou palliculAa I — I Covar titia missing/ La titra da couvartura manqua n~| Colourad maps/ Cartas gtegraphiquas 9n coutaur Colourad ink (i.a. othar than blua or black)/ Encra da coulaur (i.a. autra qua blaua ou noira) □ Colourad platas and/or Illustrations/ Planchas at/ou illustrations tn coulaur □ Bound with othar matarial/ t:««)i4 avac d'autras documants Tight binding miy causa shadows or distortion along intarior margin/ La re liure sarrie paut causar da I'ombra ou da la distortion la long da la marge intAriaura Blank leaves added during restoration may appaar within the text. Whenever possible, thesa have been omitted from filming/ II sa paut que certaines pages blanches ajouttes lors d'une restauration apparaissant dans la taxta, mais, lorsque cala Atait possible, ces pages n'ont pas M filmias. L'Institut a microfilm* la mailleur examplaira qu'il lui a Ati possible de sa procurer. Les ditaiis da cat examplaira qui sont paut-Atre uniquas du point da vua bibliographiqua, qui peuvent modifier una image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la mAthoda normala de filmaga sont indiquis ci-dessous. D Coloured pagas/ Pages da coulaur r~ll Pagas damagad/ D Pages andommagAas P«)gas restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaurAes at/ou palliculies Pagas discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pagas dAcolorAes, tacheties ou piqu6es □ Pages detached/ Pagas d6tachAes Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prir Qualiti inigale de I'impression Includes supplementary matarit Comprend du material suppi^mentaire Tha In poaaib of tha fllmini Origin baginf tha lai sion. ( othar < first pi sion, 1 or illui r~^ Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ r~| Includes supplementary matarial/ Thais shall c TINUE which IMapa, diffari antiral bagini right I raquiri mathfl D Only edition available/ Seula Mition disponibia Pagas wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc.. have been refilmed to ensure the best possible Image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuiilet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont M filmies A nouveau de fapon A obtenir la meilleure image possible. Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplAmentaires; Various pagings. Wrinkled pages may film slightly out of focus. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqu* ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X »X 30X y 12X tm 20X 24X 28X 32X Utails du lodifiar r un« mage Th« eopy fllmad hf has b—n raproduosd thanks to th« o«n«roaity of: Univanity of Aibtrta Edmonton • Tho imogM oppoarlng horo aro tha boat qualtty poaaibia eonaidaring tha condition and lagibility of tha original copy and in kaaping with tha filming oontraet apaoif Icatlona. L'aMamplaira filni4 fut raproduit grAca A la gAnAroait* da: Univtrtlty of Alberta Edmonton Laa imagaa suivantaa ont AtA raproduitas avac la plus grand soin. eompta tanu da la condition at da la nattatA da I'aKamplaira fllmA. at w oonformitA avac laa conditions du contrat da filmaga. Original copioa In printad papar covara ara fllmad baginning with tha front covar and anding on tha laat paga with a printad or llluatratad impraa- •ion, or tha back covar whan appropriata. All othar original copioa ara filmad baginning on tha firat paga with a printad or llluatratad Impraa- •ion. and anding on tha laat paga with a printad or llluatratad Impraaaton. « Laa axampiairaa origlnaux dont la eouvartura un papiar aat ImprimAa sont fllmAa mn commandant par la pramiar plat at an tarminant toit par la darnlAra paga qu? comporta una amprainta d'impraaaion ou v.<'llluatration. soit par la sacond plat, salon la caa. Toua laa autraa axamplairas origlnaux sont filmAs wi commandant par la pramlAra paga qui comporta una amprainta d'impraaaion ou d'llluatratlon at 9n tarminant par la darnlAra paga qui comporta una talla amprainta. srrata to pelure, in A n 32X Tha laat racordad frama on aach microflcha shall contain tha symbol -"^ (moaning "CON- TINUED "), or tho symbol ▼ (moaning "END"), whiehavar appliaa. Mapa. plataa, charta, ate, may ba fllmad at diffarant reduction ratios. Those too large to ba entirely included in one expoaure ara filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, aa many framea aa required. The following diagrama llluatrata the method: 12 3 Un dee symboles suivants spparattra sur la darnlAre Image do cheque microfiche, selon le caa: le symbols ^ signifle "A SUIVRE". le symbols ▼ signifis "FIN". Les cartea, planches, tableeux. etc.. peuvent Atre fllmAa A dee taux da rAduction diff Arents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atre reproduit en un soul clichA. il est f ilmA A partir da Tangle supArieur gauche, do gauche A droite, et do haut 9n bee, an prenant le nombre d'imagea nAceaaaira. Laa diagrammes suivanta iiluatrant la mAthode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 GRAMMAR or GEOGEAPHY. LOMDOMI PiUitod by A. SiKnrnwooBr, Ncw-Strcct-Square. m^W ^ A VOOIf «., 0f esjvisjLiJi 2^ GBOGRAPHY. Jpr tde us^ ^f $(b00l5 mit)(nin0 ^090110. A new Edilioii collected ouiUbdcnilied .^ i^^t- — — 4utkor ^ " Pqpidar Ilhistntiflnt of Ooipaog^SKJtc. s Cmttot /: JM». Iqt Xcufpnuai.. Qrine,Srdii^, Qrf(j(9^ ■-^ •-'*.•:,:- JHte WtUMi A4te M 100 100 101 'C JWH^yVPHV •••••••••••• 10a « C ]lMl«a««M«tt«««««**«M«t* 109 « ^laiMflff]^ of AplCilMat** 103 JPbit% worlhf of 1.— 104 V iiiiiPi aiid CttiMlM 103 i WMft>......M...^..... 110 I BortlnMi^it •• 119 TUm..^ 118 ' i MMMlKiiOK UMI 8W***« 114 '--AmQm9«m^*..... 114 TNRpffMip of tbo Siorak*««M«t»«***M»* llv Pni&icllflBi of thi biib«.M 113 V«ioliM of tkt Hu- »•••••••• 117 of f— __ MidMMm.. 113 I DMIWiBcoof RoUgioQ 'ili OviUMtloo la ill di^ IWwit Dtmoo...... 191 Socio^ond Fomo of OotfffBintot 199 Um of tht Olobtt. 195 ProUtnt on iho Tor. rHtriol Olobo 131 Brobknit on tlio Co- UtiM Olobo...«M.M 144 Of Mopo. 130 Q m o rt io ni and Sii*b oiMtt— > On tbt Map of tlio On tlM Ifi^of Siivopo 133 Ou ^ M99 9f Atkk. 133 OntboMapof AAkm 138 Oq tho Hop of MoiA Amoricn • 130 09 tlM Hop of floatli A mono n ••••*•»—»• 131 BrilialLliloadi»*.,.. 139 Quoitiont oomipondinf with tbo Foeli itotad in tbo OraBBttar. ••..«• 135 QjMtlioni on tbo Moturo ondUitofteOlobio 170 Hoigbtaof MonntointM. 179 l4itltDMiti ond f ^ iffi i^i- PUooa. 179 VodOmkury of NaoMt of Pbioit» difidod and , 173 t -■*i^. ,.-..JtL , •* :i 9m m u§ •f--^ \t ... Itl ► or ... in ■. >•• tts ' ir. ... 131 u M. 144 ... 150 tfm # IM M. XSl K p« 1J0 1.. IM M 138 lib ••• 160 itH ... Ml IM M. 169 S ... 165 . irt «• 170 M. 179 1^ lb t ... 179 1 cT nd • ... irn Ki? . » 1 s l_ ''. « ■" •* ^ GOLDSMITH'S GRAMMAR OF GEOGRAPHY. INTRODUCTION. The present volume, nvhich is chiefly designed as' an Introduction to Geography, or a description of the Earth and its Inhabitants, cannot be fuUy com* prehended without occasionally contemplating our globe in its relation to the other parts of the Solar System, and even in connection with the more re- mote celestial bodies : it tLerefore becomes neces- sary to preface the work with a brief outline of th^ principles of Astronomy. . . ASTRONOMY ' Is the science which treats of the classification, |ii^ rangement, magnitudes, distances, and motions of tli0 heavenly bodies; explains their mutual actions upon each other, and demonstrates the laws by which their motions are regulated and sustained. The term Astranomv is composed of two Greek words, signifying the una of the Startf under wliidi name the ancients comprehended not only the Stars, properly so called, but the Sun, the Moon, and all th') other celestial bodies. By far the greater part of the celestial bodies appear to be fixed in the firmament, and to preserve invariably the same relative positions ; these are the Fixid Stars. A small number, some of them re- marisable on account of their brightness, are obi^erved to be continually shifting their places amom^^ ^ star^ These are called Plan^^ that is, wm^^S^^f^ iiarSf from a Greek word e^igni^in^ a wanm^ X<^ Ingji^ Zon^ f / TIHIE "WQia «UUi Frigid m, WOBILID i»»7m/ bv XllaU,Buiy StrMUoi^mtb? 'uhni hy Lotufnum A- C: Ptihrnoatr Iftnr. 1 ..mm, . . i l i .i|. i M I> W»ff * 1f ^ .J % /ttronomy* Some of tue planets are accompanied by smaller bodies, visible only in the telescope, which revolve about them, as the Moon revolves about the Earth. These are called SateiliteSy or attendants. Another class is composed of bodies which differ greatly firom the stars and planets in appearance, and which are visible only for short periods and at irregular inter- vals. These are the ComeU, from canutf hair, to which the train of light they carry along with them has occasionally some resemblance. The planets, with their satellites, and the comets, have this in common, that their motions arc dependent on the Sun. Hence, in a general way, the celestial bodies may be divided into two classes : the Soiar System^ comprehending- the erratic bodie«; and the Sidereai System, which comprehends the fixed stars. THE SOLAR SYSTEM Consists of the Sun, from which it takes its name ; eleven Primarv Planets; eighteen Secondary Pla- nets, or Satellites; and an unknown number of Comets. The Sun, the great source of light and heat to the planetary bodies, is nearly 95 millions of miles db- tant from the Earth ; his diameter is 1 1 1^ times the diameter of the EarUi, or upwards of 882 thousand miles; consequently his magnitude is upwards of 1,384,000 times that of the Earth. His density is about one quarter that of the Earth ; and a body which weighs one pound at the surface of the Eartn would weigh 28 pounds if carried to the surface of the Sun. On examining the solar disc with the telescope, it is sometimes seen to be partially covered by dark spots, difiering from one another in form and magnitude. Inese spots move from east to west across the disc of the Sun, and seem to be confined nailer jvolve g^arth. lother from h are inter- lir, to them ianets, his in )n the bodies Idereal name; Y Pla^ ber of Ifario ty f zoi di! miJ 96 pej m( onl apj ex| vel cli Astmrnmy. 8 to a region not extending more than aliout 30^ from his equator ; some of them have been observed 80 large as to exceed the earth four or five times in size. The period of their apparent revolution is about 25^ days ; whence, as they are supposed to belong to the solar atmosphere* it is concluded that the Sun revolves on its axis, and that the period of rotation is 25^ days. The Primary rlanets are those which revolve about the Sun as a centre. They are eleven ki number ; their order in the system, their names, and the symbols by which thev are denoted, being as follows : — Mercury {^ , Venus ^ , the Earth (g. Mars ^, Vesta fi, Juno f*, Ceres ^, Palius (, Jupiter %9 Saturn f^, and Uranus ij^, called also, after its discoverer, Herschcl, but by him named the Georgium Sidus, in honour of George III. Six of these, namely, Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn, have been known from the remotest ages; the other five have been dis- covered in modem times, and are only visible in the telescope. They all revolve about the Sun in the same direction, that is, from west to east, in orbits nearly circular, and all situated within a narrow zone of the heavens. Mercury is the planet nearest to the Sun, his mean distance from the Sun being about 36 millions of * miles. He performs his revolution in rather less than 96 days; and his rotation on his axis is supposed to be performed in about 24 hours, 5^ minutes. His dia* meter b only 3140 miles, and his magnitude about one-sixteenth part of that of the earth ; the greatest apparent tlistance of Mercury from the Sun never exceeds 28^ 48^ in consequence of which he can very rarely be seen with the naked eye in our climates. Vtnusj the next in order, revolves ai the mea» B 2 A 4 . A»troHotnj^. distance of 68 miilions of miles from the Sun ; the tiuw of her revolution is 224^^ days, and the length of her day, or her time of rotation, 23 hours, 21 minutes, 7 seconds; her diameter is 7700 miles, and her magnitude about nine-tenths of that of the Earth. Venus is alternately the morning and evening star. In the telescope she sometimes appears homed, sometimes gibbous, like the Moon. Mercury and Venus are called inferior planets, because their orbits are enclosed in that of the Earth. The others are called fiipertor planets, because their orbits enclose the orbit of the Earth. The Earth. It was proved by Copernicus, who died in 1543, that the Earth is also a planet, the third la order from the Sun ; and that the celestial motions which we observe are only apparent, and iuise from the motion of the Earth in its orbit, and its rotation about its o^vn axis. The mean distance of the Earth from the Sun is 95 millions of miles, and its revolution is performed in nearly 365^ days ; ' so that the velocity with which it moves is about 19 miles in a second. The Earth is not a perfect sphere, being a little flattened at the poles ; its mean diameter is 7916 miles. The axis of the Earth is inclined to the plane of the ecliptic, or plane 4n which the annual motion is performed, M'hence the equator does not coincide with the ecliptic; the two planes make with each other an angle of about 234 degrees. If the equator comcided with the ecliptic, the heat and cold in each part of the Earth would be the same throughout the whole year. In fact, however, the northern part of our globe inclines towards the Sun during one half of the year, and the southern part during the other half. By this simple arrangement, the Earth, while revolving in its orbit, and presenting itself differently to the Sun, at different times of t^ year and day, under^ AHrotwmy, $ goes all the gradations of heat and cold, the va- rieties of day and night, and the grateful succeMion of the seasons. Mars revolves at the distance of 142 millions of miles from the Sun ; his revolution is performed in about 687 days, and his rotation on his axis in 24 hours S9} minutes ; his diameter is only 4100 miles, or little more than half the diameter of our Earth. He is easily distinguished by his dull red appear- ance. Vesta^ Juno, Ceres, and Pallas, are very small planets, and are never visible excepting through a good telescope. Their mean distances from the 8un, and their times of revolution, are nearly the same. Vesta is rather nearest the Sun, her mean distance being about 225 millions of miles ; the mean distance of Pallas, the most remote, is 260 millions of miles. The time in which each peribrms its revolution is nearly as follows: — Vesta 1S25 days; Juno 1592 days; Ceres 1681 days; Pallas 1686 days. Their diameters, by reason of their smallness, cannot be determined with certainty. Ceres was discovered in 1801, Pallas in 1802, Juno in 1804, and Vesta in 1 807. Jupiter, The mean distance of this planet from the Sun is above 485 millions of miles, and the time of his revolution 4332 days, or nearly 12 years. The length of his day is only 9 hours and 56 minutes. Jupiter is the largest of all the planetb. His di- ameter is nearly 1 1 times that of the Earth, bein^ about 86,000 miles; and his magnitude is 1280 times that of the Earth. Saturn revolves at the distance of 890 millions of miles from the Sun, which is about 9^ times the distance of the Sun from the Earth. His revolution is accomplished in about 29| years. The rotation on his axis is, like that of Jupiter, very rapid, being • ^ 3 H AttranofHjf. pcrformecl in 10 hours 29^ minutes. His diameter is nearly ten times greater than that of the Earth, and his magnitude 995 times that of tlie Earth. This planet is surrounded by a double ring, very thin and broad ; an appendage to which none of the other planets have any thing similar. Uranus is by far the most remote of all the planets, his mean distance from the Sun being 1800 millions of tniles, or 19 times the distance of the Sun from the Earth. His period of revolution is 84 years ; the time of his rotation is not known. On account of his great distance, his magnitude can« not be accurately determined : it is supposed to be about 80 times that of the Earth. Uranus was dis* covered by Sir William Herscliel in 1781. The Secondary Planets^ Satellites^ or MoonSf are bodies which revolve about their respective primaries, in the same manner as the Primary Planets revolve about the Sun. Of these, one attends on our Earth, four move round Jupiter, seven muid Saturn, and six round Uranus. They are all 0pK]ue bodies, and serve to reflect the light of the Sun upon their respective primaries. The MooHf in revolving about the Earth, exhibits a variety of appearances, called her' phases. To understand these, it is to be observed, that, as the Moon is a globular opaque body, enlightened by ^^he Sun, only one side can be illuminated at once. When, ther^ore, the Moon is between the Earth and the Sun, or, as it is commonly called, in con- junction, her enlightened side is wholly turned away from the Earth, and no part of her is seen ; it is then New Mock. When the Moon is in the point of her orbit opposite to the Sun, her illuminated side is turned towards the Earth ; she is then seen wholly bright; or it is Full Moon. In passing from the tonjtinction to the opposition, she is first seen as a Aitroiiomy, '7 beautiful crescent of light, and is then said to be horned ; when she appears lialf full, she is said to be in her first quarter. From thi^ point to the oppo- sition, her breadth continues to increase, and she is said to be gibbous. After passing the full, her light undergoes similar gradations, but in a reversed order ; and when she again comes between the Earth and Sun, she is said to have completed a lunation. All these phenomena depend on the relative posi- tions of the Sun, the Earth, and the Moon. The distance of the Moon from the Earth is about 237 tliousand miles ; and the time from one New Moon to another is somewhat more than 29^ days. Her diameter is 2160 miles, and her magni- tude -^^th of that of the Earth. The Moon has no atmosphere ; consequently there is no water on her surface, and no animals or plants, constituted like those on the Earth, could live there. Volcanoes and mountains are seen on her surface when viewed through powerful telescopes. The Moon, at her opposition, sometimes passes through the Eartli's shadow ; in which case she is partially or totally obscured, and is said to suffer an eclipse. Sonjetimes she conies between the Sun and the Earth, and by intercepting the Sun's light causes an eclipse of the Sun. An eclipse of the Moon can only happen when the Moon is full ; and a Solar eclipse can only happen at New Moon. The number of eclipses in a year cannot be less than two, nor more than seven ; but for any par- ticular part of the Earth they are frequently invisible. The Satellites of Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus, perform the same ofRces to their respective prima- ries that the Moon performs to the Earth. From the eclipses of Jupiter's Satellites, it has been ascer- tained that light requires 8 minutes and 13 seconds to come from the Sun to the Earth. Thesfe four 8 Asirtmom^. SatellitM ma? be teen at any time with ordinary telaioopes ; tlioae of Saturn, and fmrtionlarly tfioao of Uranus, can only be teen with the aid of tele* •coDet of the moit powerful Icind. Comets form the most numerous elass of bodies which belong to our syntem, and sometimes exhibit appearances which render them the most impos- ing of all natural phenomena. Lilco the planrts, they revolve about the Sun, but differ in many im« portant particulars from those bodies. The head of a comet consists of an ill-deffncd nebulous mass of luminous matter, brightest in the centre; and although they doubtless shine by reflecting the solar light, vet, as even the largest that have been observed liave failed to exhibit any phases, it seems probable that they consist only of vapour penetrable by the rays of the Sun, and reflect those rays from their interior parts, as well as from their external surface. From the head of the comet a stream of light, some- times separated into two parts, appears to diverge in a direction opposite to that of tlio Sun. This magnificent appendage is called the train, or tail ; it grows broader as its distance from the head of tlic oomet increases, and is sometimes of a prodigious length, extending, in some recorded instances, to 46 , 70^, and even 90^ Some comets are furnished with several tails or diverging streams of light ; while others, particularly small telescopic ones, are fre- quently found entirely destitute of tlmt appendage. The tiul of a comet is always transparent, the snmll- est stars being visible through it The number of the comets is unknown ; several hundreds having been observed since the discovery of the telescope, and these form, probably, a v^ry small proportion of the whole. Scarcely any two of them have been found to pursue nearly the samn track. Their magnitudes are also extremely various ; nor is there a greater regularity observed with respect to their motionsi AMtrmiamjf. 9 tome of them moving in the i aie direction m the plnncUi, lome of them in an opposite direction, and tome at right angles to the orbita of the plaiicta. Notwithstanding tht^ great number of the comets, there are only three which are certainly known to have been observed in success! vt revolutions. These are, 1st. Halley*s rnmet. whkli performs its revolu* tion in 76 yi^ars ; 2d. Kncke's, which makes a revo* lution in about 3 years and 4 months; and, 3d. Biela's, the revolution of which U completed in 6 years and 9 months. TUB 8IDBRBAL SYSTEM. Besides the bodies which have been already de- scribed, the boundleHH regions of space beyond the solar system present to our view myriads of splendid self-luminouf objects, which, though probably o\ the same nature as our Sun, and manv of them Eossibly far exceeding the Sun in magnitude, appear, y reason of their immense distances from us, only as so many brilliant points. The Fixed Siars are arranged by astronomers, with reference to their apparent magnitudes, into several classes or orders, tne brightest and largest being called stars of the first magnitude ; the next to these in lustre, stars of the second magnitude ; and so on to the sixth, which arc the smallest visible to the [naked eye. Stars which cannot be discerned with- out the aid of a telescope are comprehended under [the general denomination of Telescopic Stars. The stars are not equally scattered over the [heavens, but disposed in groups, or ConsteUoHom^ . to which, from the remotest antiquity, names have »een given from certain figures of men or animals to which they were conceived to have some resem- ilonce. These fanciful appellations are still retained » m our celestial globes and charts ; some of the most 10 Attranomy. conspicuous stars are, however, distinguished by par- ticular names. The whole number of stars visible to the naked eye is probably about SOOO ; of these, however, seldom more than a thousand can be seen by unassisted vision at any one time above the horizon. By the aid of the telescope their number is prodi- giously increased. In a portion of the Milky Way, which is nothing but an assemblage of multitudes of small stars, Sir W. Herschel observed the sur- prising number of 50,000 pass throu^^h the field of his telescope in one hour*s time. Every attempt to determine the actual distance of the stars has hitherto failed. All that astronomers have been able to ascertain with certainty upon the subject is, that the distance of Sinus (supposed to be the nearest fixed star) cannot be so small as 19 millions of millions of miles : how much greater it may be is unknown. Some of the stars are found to undergo a period- ical variation of lustre, amounting in one or two instances to a complete extinction and revival ; others have appeared for a while, and then died away altogether. Many stars are found to be double or triple; and of these, some exhibit the beautiful phenomena of contrasted or complementary colours, &c. ; for example, if one of the stars is red, the other is generally green. Though the fixed stars have no sensible motion relatively to each other, yet the places of many of them, when determined at considerable intervals of time by very accurate astronomical instruments, are found to undergo small changes. Some stars which are mentioned by ancient astronomers have now ceased to be visible. Our limits prevent us from entering into further details; we shall therefore conclude by referring Geugrapkical D^nitiont, 11 those ii^ho wish for full and accurate information on this subject to Sir John Herschers <' Treatise on Aptronomy," in the Cabinet Cyclopcsdia. BVNOPTIO TABLE OP THE MOST IMPORTANT ELEMENTS OF TUB SOLAR SYSTEM. i Sun Mercury Venus Earth Mars i Jupiter % Saturn Uranua I Mean Pla- meter in Bnifliih Milet. I 888,634 8,150 7.718 74)16 4,093 85,968 79,013 34;2U9 OtatancM froni the Hun In English MUet. 36,000,000 68,000,000 A'>.000,000 142,000,000 4a 2d, The Pacific Ocean, or South Sea, which divides America from Asia, and is, generally, about ten thousand miles across ; -— Sd, The India H Ocean, which lies between Africa and the East Indies and New Holland, and is about three thousand miles over. We also meet with the names of the JbaMem, or Antaretie Ocean, lying round tlie South Pole; and of the Sortkem or Arctic Ocean, lying round the Nofth Pole : the latter bore also the name of the Frozen Ocean ; but this is equally applicable to the Southern Ocean. A tea is a smaller body of salt water, as the Mediterranean Sea, the Baltie Sea, the Arabian Sea. An arckipdago is a part of a sea studded with numerous islands, and is especially applied to that lying between Europe and Asia, which contains the Greek islands. A gmlf is an arm of the sea, extending more or less into the land, as the Gulf of Finland, the Gulf of Mexico, and the GuU of Peiiia. A harbour or haven is a little gulf. A ha^ is an arm of the sea, having a much wider opening than a gul^ as the Bay of Biscay. A cove is a very snudl bay. A TMd is a part of the sea adjoining the land, where ships nipy iRebor salcly. A creeA is a small inlet of the sea. A wkm is • stream of water running through a country* 8apBtr strei^ms ore dcnominnted rivulets or brook% hi\ iterrtne«n \U iO '.i\> A jr^: \ fO**M *t»» .^^ J,ll" >^' ,sV>^ r M V t \ 1 1 \ ^ 1 1 r 1 1 ■ "'***^^-n.^^^*«r'^ s?x f j ^< 1 Mlllr ( ■Ulrt l ) l l il i l i l«8»M»»l— »«l iKMMaMWMM i V >;v «»««wamii m i ' ti mjiDwI t n i i i jm i iiiinimx wt^-.^ miLtfWi ii'"'''* ^ s^l^S ^r Uibtui ^*i ^^r^* ^^ S^^B&!^'f / ^ ht-/r^^ l» s^^^ '^^* Wa* WOC*MN^ V ■*■' A. l,onii(tn,J^ihUrltnl I'll /.<>ii>ui .<■ (V/'«frtT«>J ihUHinl hi) Liiititiiutti .<■ (V I'lti-niKstvf Jioty, A'li./mi-rtJ hv S.Uilll^ Biirv .>Vr.' Wmmishf 7'/i€ Earth. 19 artificial line of water made for the purpoaet of trade, ii called ft sanaL Tlio toure% of a rifer means its origin, wHch is ge- nerally on the side of high mountains. The numih of a river is tlie place where it terminates by falling into tlie sea. Tl.« knecting of two rivers is called their etn^utnei. Strait; a term generally used in tlie plural, signifying • narrow part of the sea, forming a passage iVom one sea U^ another ; as the Straits of Gibraltar, the Straita of Magellany the Straits of Dover, Behring's Straits. A ehannd is a long passage of water from one sea to another^ the English Channel, which connects the Atlantic Ocean ^with the North Sea. In Scotland it is often called a soumi, as the Sound of Mull. A frith (/return) is a narrow sea into which a large river [fiills ; as the Frith of Forth, the Frith of Clyde, Solway Frith. An estuary is the union of several rivers as they approach [the sea, as the Humbcr. Currents are extensive movements by which the waters of Ihe sea are carried, without any immediate impulse of wind or ide, in a particular direction. OF THE WHOLE EARTH. 26. The surface of the Earth contains nearly two mdred millions of square miles, and more thfin ro thirds of it are covered with vater. Its oirctim- )rence is S60 degrees, or 24,876 English miles ; ke equatorial length of a degree being nearly 69^ >f those miles. 27* The land is divided into four great portion^^ illed quarters ; namely, Europe, Asia, Africa, knd America ; comprising about fifty-six milliona >f square miles. The entire assemblage of islands, large and small, situated lii , le gpreat ocean between America and Asia, is sometimes apokm If as a fifth part of the world, and called Australia, Aoatt^ na, or Polyneaia, and by the French geographers Oeea^iea^ Lustralasia and Polynesia arc often considmd as two ^w p0l0 KvisiQiil It will be seen, by a reference to the map, thit tkn It continents Asia, Africa, and Ameriea, temivite C u Eunfk. to th« MQihward In etpti ; Aula in Capt Comorin, AMm in Ui« Cape oi Good Hope, and Amarioa in Capt Horn. The moRt ttriliing oiroumstanca it the iminanne preponderance ol land in the northern heminphere. Two thirds of the land on the habitable glolie are situated to the north of the trople uf Cancer, and sauroel/ a tenth to Uie aouth of the tropic of Ca- pricorn. Obs. 1. The natmrol boundatitt of the earth are oceans, sea% rivers, and mountains. S. Cimi or pdiHeal boundaries are the arbitrary and cliange- able limits of adjacent states or kingdoms, depending on poli- tical and military events ; but even these have ofVen reference to some striking local features, such as snudi rivers, hills, he, 28. The habitable parts of the earth are calcu- lated to occupy a space of thirty-nine millions of square miles, of which Europe contains five, Asia elev^, Africa nine, and America fourteen. 29. The number of inhabitants is conjectured at about eight hundred millions, and there may be on each square^ mile, in Europe 92, in Asia 46| in Africa 9, and in America 3 souls. EUROPE. SO. Op the four great divisions, or quarters of the world, Europe is the smallest ; but it is inhabited by an enterprising and intelligent race of men, who possess most extensive dominions, and have a pr^ ponderating influence, in the oth^r continents. . 31* Europe comprehends the following grand divisions: — Sweden and Norway, Pcnmark, Hussia, Prussia^ Poland, Holland, Belgiunn* Germany, A ustria, Turkey, Greece, France, Sivitaerland, Spain« Portugal, Italy, United Kingdom uf Great Britain and Ireland. Of these, Germany and Italy are subdivided into tctcrsl Jbu^tipt^ 15 Afrifltin wfu Th« loninM of !• Und on I tropio u/ pio of Cl- eanly MM, id ehange- \g on polU \ reference hilli, he. re calcu- iUions of ve, Asia sturcd at lay be on a 46, in artera of inhabited nen, who ve a pre- nts. ig grand a, Cingdom u/ Britain and i. nto tctcral klngdotiM and ttattfi, nio«tly independent of each otheff aa wiU be particuUriiied under their respective heads. 32. It has four inland seas, called the Mediter- ranean, the Baltic, the Black Sea, and the White Sea. 33. The principal European islands are. Great Britain and Ireland, Iceland, Zealand, Funen, Can- dia> Sicily, Sardinia, Corsica, Majorca, Minorca, the Ionian Islands, and the numerous small Greek islands in the Archipelago. SI*. The principal rivers in Europe are the Volga^ the Danube, the Vistula, the Don, the Dnieper, the Rhine, the Elbe, the Po, the Tagus, and the Thames. Obi. If the length of the Thamet is taken at 1, then the length of the Rhine, of the Danube, and the Volga, will be aa 6^, 7, and 9f 35. The most elevated mountains in Europe are» the Alps, which cover Switzerland, and divide Italy ^om Germany and France ; the Pyrenees, which lie l^etween France and Spain ; Haemus, or the Balkan, in European Turkey ; the Dofrefield, between Nor- way and Sweden; and the Carpathians, between lungary and Poland. Obs. l^e most mountainous countries ui Europ»4re Swit> lerland, Norway, Wales, and Scotland. The country from ^France to Russia is almost a plain. 36. The principal capes and promontories of Eu- rope are, the North Cape, the Naze of Norway, the Land's End of England, Cape Clear in Ireland, and ■the capes La Hogue, Finisterre, St. Vincent, and Ti afalgar. 37. The languages and races of Europe are, the Sclavonic, in the east ; the Teutonic, in the north and centre ; and the primitive, or Celtic, mixed with Latin, in the south and west. 38. Christianity prevails through Europe, except [In Turkey ; and is divided into the Greek Chu|»% T' 16 Sweden. of about forty millions ; Roman Catholics, about ninety ; and Protestants, of several denominations, about forty. There arc also above two millions of Jews. 8WE0EK* S9. The kingdom of Sweden now includes the extensive, but cold and thinly inhabited countries, bounded by the Baltic, the Gulf of Bothnia, and the Northern Ocean. 40. Lapland, the most northern part of Europe, and of the kingdom of Sweden, contains immense forests, chiefly of fir trees, and scanty pastures, which nourish only the rein-deer. 41. The Laplanders are of diminuilve size, but peaceable and industrious. The milk of the rein- deer supplies them with food ; and in sledges drawn by those animals they pass with the utmost rapidity over ice and snow. Oh$, \, In the northern parts of Lupland, as in countries un- d«r the same latitude, the sun is aLscnt in winter about seven wee)i8, while in summer it nerer sets for the same period. 8. These phenomena are explained and illustrated in the Problems on the Globes and Maps. See a subsequent page of thb work. 42. Norway, formerly subject to Denmark, was united to Sweden by the treaty of Kielin, 1815. Its chief towns are Christiania, Bergen, and Dron- theim. 43. It is composed of a continuous range of mountains, whose sides slope down to the sea ; and the streams and cataracts which roll down their steeps render travelling very unsafe. 44. The inhabitants raise scarcely any grain or vegetables, but import them in exchange for their timber and fiHh. In the inland and northern parts the people live on coarse fare, and in seasons ot (ttii^i Sweden. 17 about ■ nations, H liODS of H des the untries, ia, and i Europe, "M Timense M ostures^ m ze, but -^ lie rein- W 1 drawn n rapidity itrics un- Dut seven 'iod. >d in the 1 lent page 1 irk, was M , 1815. 1 Dron- 1 ange of m ^a; and 9 n their fl ;rain or or their n parts sons oi fcaretty are sometimes obliged to mix bark 'f tn*^^ with their bread. 45. On the coast of Norway are innumeraf'*ji small islands, occupied by birds and some few fishermen ; and on tlic north is a dangerous vortex of the sea, called the MaelAtrom. 46. Norway contains valuable forests of fir, which forms its chief export. It has also extensive fish- eries, with valuable quarries, and mines of silver and other metals ; these it exchanges for corn and other neoossaries. 47. Exclusive of Norway and Lapland, Sweden is divided into Sweden Proper, Gothland, aitd West Bothnia. These are subdivided into numerous pro- vinces, which include the islands of Gottland and (Eland, in the Baltic. 48. The chief towns are, Stockholm, the capital, in 59° 20' of north latitude ; Upsal, famous for its university; Gothenburg, a celebrated trading port; and Carlscrona, the naval port and arsenal. Obs. Stockholm occupies seven small rocky islands, and the Scenery around is truly singular and romantic. Most of the houses are of stone, or brick, covered with white stucco ; ei* Kept in the suburbs, where several are of wood painted red. The royal palace stands in a central and high situation : and there are a castle, an arsenal, and several academies. The population is estimated at 30,000. 49. The chief wealth of Sweden consists in its mines of iron and copper. The copper mines are very spacious. 50. Sweden is a barren country, remarkable for Ihe number and extent of its lakes and woods. Its rivers are numerous ; but few are navigable. To- wards the north, about its middle region, Sweden has only two seasons ; nine months' winter, and three months summer, during which vegetation is wonder* fully rapid. Its agriculture has of late been greatly improved. c 3 18 Denmark. 51. The Swedish islands are numerous ; but those constituting the archipelago of Aland have been ceded to Russia. In the Baltic Sea there are no tides ; but a current mostly sots from it into the North Sea. Extent, Konrsy Sweden Papmtatiom i« 182^ Norway 18126. Sweden ToUl 1 45,000 iqusrs mltct. 195,000 1,050,1 f)9 9,864,831 9,91 4,M9 Tho population may now exceed 4,000,9GOi DENMARK. 52. The kingdom of Denmark consists of tho .j islands of Zealand, Funen, 8cc. ; the peninsula of Jutland ; the duchies of Holstein, Sleswick, and Lauenburg ; and the remote islands of Iceland aint Faroc> wiUi West Greenland. Obi, At the close of the last war, Denmark was eompcllvd to eeds the kingdom of Norway to Sweden { hut, by the dcH- nitivt treaty, the little proYince of Lauenburg in Germany, which was detsebcd from Hanover, was given in exchange. 53. Its chief town, Copenhagen, is in the island of Zealand. At the castle of Elsinore, in the strait called the Sound, foreign ships that trade to tlie Baltic must pay a small toll. 54. The narrow sea situated between Zealand and Funen is called the Great Beit ; and that be- tween Funen and the continent is named the Little SelL 55. Iceland is a Danish bland in the North Sctu distinguished for its boiling springs, volcanoes, and other indications of subterraneous fires. Hecla, a lofty mountain, wrapped in perpetual snow, is the principal volcano. The inhabitants are poori but virtuous and intelligent. mtthoie >ve been t are no into the t9 mllct. t > r of the nsula of cky and and aiat ompclltMl ' tho diTi. lange. e island e strait to the Zealand hat bc- 3 LiU/e Sea, and [ecla, a b the »r. but Russia, 19 56» The western coast of Greenland is famous for its whale-fishery ; but this is chiefly carried on by other nations : and Denmark has only a few small settlements on the coast. Extentt exclusive of Iceland and the Faroe Isles, 22,000 square miles. Population, 2,093,300. RUSSIA* 57. The Russian empire, the most extensive in the world, comprehends a large portion of Europe, and all the northern parts of Asia ; but its population IS not more than fifty-two millions. Obs, 1. With the newly constituted kingdom, or rather vice- royalty, of Poland, and the western province of Finland, the empire contains forty-five governments ; and these include the ancient states of Carelia, Esthonia, Ingria, Livonia, together with the duchy of Courland, Lithuania lying on tlie south- . western side of Petersburg, and the country of the Don Cos- -.aacks. It is bounded, on the north, by the Northern Ocean;, on the south, by Austria, the Black and Caspian Seas, and ;^Tartary; on the e^t, by the Seas of Okhotsk and Kamtschatka, or rather by the Northern Pacific Ocean ; and, on the west, ^y Sweden and the Baltic. By the partitions of Poland, in 1772, 1793, and 1795, Russia juircd three fifths of that kingdom, with a population of ;,7CX),000 inhabitants ; and, aflcr the overthrow of the power >f Buonaparte, the central part of Poland, which he had taken from Prussia and Austria, and formed into the Grand Duchy )f Warsaw, was declared by the Allies an independent king, lom, with the £mperor of Russia for king. But in 1 832, the ^^mperor Nicholas decreed that the kingdom of Poland shall lenceforth form an integral part of the Russian empire ; so Iha;: Poland can no longer be considered as a kingdom. Ac- cording to a statistical account in 1832, the number of inha-'^ Mtants in Poland was 3,914,G66. By a peace with Persia in 11814, a great portion of the extensive regions which bound the ICaspian Sea, on the west, were acquired. In 1827, other ^acquisitions were made by treaty. Oh9» 2. Since 1812, by treaty with Russia, the boundary of Turkejr, on the north-east, is formed by the rivers Pruth and Danube. Ilcnce the whole of Bessarabia, with H great por« 20 Ru8Sl(U tiun of Moldavia, formerly a part of Turkey, is now, also, liu eluded in tlic Russian empire. 58. The Russian government is despotic, but tole- rably mild in its administration. The sovereign has the title of Emperor, Czar, and Autocrat of all the Russias. Siberia is used as a place of banishment, at the pleasure of the sovereign. The chief part of the population of European Russia is in a state of bondage, the peasantry being bought and sold with the land. Tlie government has long desired to emancipate the peasants, and the late Emperor Alexander set the example, by setting free those on the estates of the crown ; but the pre- judices of the nobles, and the ignorance of the peasantry them- selves, are obstacles not to be conquered at once, even by an absolute prince. The wealth of the nobles is estimated by the ntiaiber of their boors or peasants. 59. The climate of Russia in the northern parts is very severe ; but in the southern districts, and on the shores of the Black Sea, it is temperate and agreeable. 60. The principal towns are, Petersburg, the mo- dern capital, in 59° 50' of north latitude ; Moscow (properly Mosqua), the ancient capital ; Archangel, a port on the White Sea ; Odessa and Cherson, on the Black Sea ; Warsaw, the capital of Poland ; and Riga, a great port on the Baltic. St. Petersburg, the imperial residence, was founded by the Czar Peter the Great, in 170.% in a low marshy spot of ground on the river Neva. Of all the capital cities of Europe it is that which at the first sight strikes the eye of a stranger with the greatest surprise ; the breadth and cleanliness of the streets, the elegance of the buildings, the noble canals, and the r^u- larity of the edifices on their banks, present a most impre»iv« ipectacle. " The united magnificence of all the other cities oK Europe,** says a modern traveller, " could but equal St. Peters- burg; and there is nothing litde or mean to ofr«;nd the sight t all i% grand, extensive, wide, and open ; and the streets, which are spacious and straight, seem to consist entirely of palaces. The buildings are lofly and elegant; the public structures, quays, piers, ramparts, ^c, are all composed of masses of solid 1 ill 1" ,;ii!-"|" 7#^ BFflrFSWRW : JJia^u ■ »ii 1 f ■r »"-:&■ " -# ■ ' m n »«. ^ ii*-,.::tl;:;:r^ pi..-~i fc- - -- ^ _„:■ J. — ... :^ -^--^mdMKi Eidl h^. ^, s^^^^W ^^_^^^^^^«|h|H^^|9| - . ■ ■' f •' ' A _,,wg0iK>-"'" ''?-■ J -" . ^ ^^ ?^^- ""' [^:-^HH ^ '•''** •^ ' fl m^ ^^ ■ ^•^:..: ,.., ... ,A!lfJ PET ER SBURG KUSSIANS ,'-t village lani, and ie of the den are U ^ I \ Belgium, fiS m> « —■ » » ii« litil lilt Loiiifniini X' (".'I , ■■'HI— -" I £ ■■ - * V» V &* A* i ' ' t ^\ Mi*l«"i , '"'"iiiKiigi i» ' iw 1 ^ Ki.i, nmiii fc «iHiiliii[iiii iiiiii.'ni.ii' «' f Ill" niiiiiiiuimi Miinuiiitiu ^^ ^ i>) s: T ^'^""i>.. ^ . .. , iL .-»' \v .• i\ .v'vrS?'-^'"''^ \. r\ 4^ aicMk V "MiincfAfl-'iirif >i'.t,tiii, , /.•/•/! i// itrauhii , , i*HNSUII .«im.slint l.iiV IB liirlhuftt ' (•fiiiiaii Stii1«>.H '^ttVU/AtiMajtfJ S,-htntrtihunfSonii,fvh,nuen S.S. "^^I'rim t^ _^V- \jt •*""•"♦ W'/w«i^- . s.w. /W«/<^«'J a Sf-hfttrfthrin) /iiiiiitijrHrtitt S.B. .st^utnutntnfj m ^«^^ .^■"*^T ♦A*^^ I'tfitif- Afiinnlt^ /Uinutiy ii«^ Jlt it r k e y Sti.iv Uiltihiinjhinmvn S.H. .^IMV trttthtl S.U. unt s.i". — H. >Vj.iv Afehthioen s.M. H'lt/ifrt'A' vr. ffi'.tjtf Ihimur/mtf ECO. '7rn.J'iiNijtliti/ I'll l,i>n<)niiiii A'' l".' I'iihithvrh-r llt'if . Sfhfnimffy S.n.,ll.fiun, XtrfH/o.vii.vh'' 26 Gennany Obt, ISelgiuin b very fertile, and higtily cultivated. Its manufactures of lace and cambric are the .finest in the world. Antwerp, Ghent, and Bruges, were once the most flourishing commercial cities in Europe, and, after having declined, are now reviving. Tlie religion is Roman Catholic. JExtent, 12,000 square miles. Population, 4,000,000. GEBMANY. 79. The extensive country called Germany Mas fomerly divided into nine great portions, called circles : three northern, namely, Westphalia, Lower Saxony and Upper Saxony ; three in the middle, Lower Rhine, Upper Rhine, and Franconia; and three southern, Swabia, Bavaria, and Austria. 80. This division into circles is now little regarded, and Germany has been divided into kingdoms, grand duchies, duchies, principalities, and free cities ; but, in regard to foreign nations, they have been formed into one great body, called the Germanic Confederal tion, consisting of 38 members. Obi, The objects of the Confederation are, the maintenance of tlie external and internal safety of Germany, and the inde- pendence and inviolability of the confederated states. The affairs of the Confederation are confided to a Federativ! Diet, in which all the members may vote by their plenipoten- tiaries, either individually or collectively, in the following manner : — Votes. m I « • • 4 1. Austria • i • 8. Pru&sia • • 5. Bavaria . • • . 4. Saxony • • . 5« Hanover - . • 6. Wirterabcrg - • • 7v Baden . ^ . , 8. Electoral Hesse, or Hesse- Casscl 9. Grand Duchy of Hesse (Hesse- Darmstadt) 10. Denmark, for Holstein 11. Netherlands, for Luxemburg • 12. Brunswick, 2; and Nassau, 2 13. Mechlenburg-Scbwcrin, 2; Strelitz, 1 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 S S 8 4 8 Germany. 27 14. Saxe-Weimar» Saxo-Gotha, Saxe-Coburg, Saxe- Mdningent and Saxe-Hildburghausen, each 1 - 5 15. Holsteiu- Oldenburg, I ; A nhalt- Dessau, 1 ; Anhalt- Dernbcrg, 1 ; Anhalt-Kothen, or Cothen, 1 ; Schwartzburg-Sondershausen, 1 ; Schwartzburg- Rudolstadt, 1 - - - - - 6 16. Hohenzollern-Hcchingen, 1 ; Lichtenstein, 1 ; Ho- hcnzoUern-Sigmaringen, 1 ; Waldeck, 1 ; Elder Reuss, 1 ; Younger Keuss, 1 ; Schaumburg-LippC) 1 ; Lippe, 1 - - - - - 8 17. Ttie four free cities of Frankfort, Bremen, Ham- burg, and Lubecky each a vote - - - 4 Total - 69 Austria presides in the Federative Diet, which sits at Frank- fort. This distribution of votes, reducing the number of members to 1 7, applies to all ordinary discussions ; questions being de- «^ided by a majority of the 1 7 votes : but on extraordinary occa- 'r-, the Diet forms itself into a general assembly, in which I. state votes individually, and a majority of two thirds of uie G9 votes is required for a decisiout 81. According to this constitution, each separate state is uncontrolled in the administration of its own internal affairs ; yet the Diet has actually interfered in many instances, particularly in controlling the freedom of the press. 82. The principal rivers of Germany are, the Da- nube, the largest in Europe ; the Rhine, running from Switzerland to Holland; the Elbe, running through Prussia and Saxony; the Oder, through Silesia and Brandenburgh ; theWeser, through West- phalia; the Mayn, through Franconia. 83. Germany abounds in timber and valuable minerals ; it produces also abundance of grain, and some very fine wines. It has extensive manufac- tures, the chief branches being linen, glass, and porcelain. The Germans are brave, persevering, and industrious. The Protestant religion was first introduced there, and is professed in most of the D 2 28 Germany, northern districts ; but the south is generally Ca« tholic. ^ Extent, 250,552 square miles. Population, above 31 mil- lions. SAXONY. 84. The Qlectorate of Saxony was created a king- dom by Napoleon, after his conquest of Prussia. He annexed to it also the duchy of Warsaw in Poland ; but after his defeat in 1814, Saxony was stripped of that, and of several of its German territories. It contains now only 1,449,587 inhabitants, who are industrious and enlightened. 85. The capital cf Saxony is Dresden, one of the finest cities in Germany, celebrated for its splendid collection of paintings, statues, &c. formed by the taste of its sovereigns, who have been munificent patrons of the fine arts. Leipzig is also a very flou- rishing town, famous for its fairs, where the whole book trade of Germany is carried on. BAVARIA. 86. This electorate was also created a kingdom by Napoleon. The capital is Munich (Muncnen) ; and the Bavarian dominions, bounded by the Aus- trian States, Wirtemburg, and Saxony, contain above four millions of inhabitants. This kingdom includes tht fine cities of Ratisbon {Regensburg), Augsburg, Wiirzburg, &c. It enjoys a representative consti- tution. Munich, the capital, has been embellished during the last and the present reigns with several public buildings of great beauty and magnificence ; and, under the patronage of the reigning sovereign, its already splendid collections of works of ancient and modern ai*t bid fair to give it in this respect the first rank among German cities. Wirtemberg, — Hanover. — Smaller States. 29 S WIRTEMBERG. 87. This is another of Napoleon's kingdoms, and the smallest in Germany, containing not more than a million and a half of people. Its capital is Stut- gard, and it contains also the strong and ancient city Di Ulm. It enjoys a representative constitution. HANOVER. 88. This electorate has also been changed into a kingdom, after the example of the preceding. It suffered in the last war, but is now reviving. Its sovereign is also the king of Great Britain. With itH dependencies it contains about three millions of inhabitants, who are governed by a viceroy. Han- over is the capital, and Emden and Bremerlehe are the chief ports. It contains also the flourishing university of Gottingen. SMALLER PRINCIPALITIES AND STATES. 89. Germany contains many minor states of some importance. Among these the chief are, Baden, on the borders of Switzerland, comprising the mountainous territory called the Black Forest, and including, besides Carlsruhe, the capital, the beau- tiful city of Mannheim. It is governed by a Grand Duke, and has a representative constitution. Po- pulation, 1,100,000. — Hesse-Cassel, a flourishing territory m the north, governed by an Elector, with a population of 700,000, and having Cassel for its capital. — Darmstadt, a territory on the Rhine, governed by a Grand Duke, and including the fine ancient city of Mentz, or Mayence. — Brunswick, famous for the bravery of its dukes, from whose house the British royal family is descended. -» Weimar, noted for the patronage of men of genius, and considered the literary capital of Germany., — V 3 30 Austria, Mecklenburg-Scliwerin, and Mecklenburg- Strelitz ; the last of which, though small, has given two queens to England. Oldenburg also deserves notice. There are a great number of very small principa- lities, which will be found enumerated in the list of the German Confederation. 90. The free cities of Germany, formerly very Qtfmerous and flourishing, are now reduced to four: Hamburgh, at the mouth of the Elbe, the greatest commercial city of Germany; Frankfort on the Mayn, a great seat of inland trade, and the place where the Diet assembles ; Lubcck, once the head of a great maritime confederacy, called the Haiise Towns, but now decayed; Bremen, a flourishing sea. port at the mouth of the Weser. AUSTRIA. 91. Austria is an extensive empire, having its original seat in Germany ; but its largest territories are now beyond the limits of that country. Its sovereign was formerly emperor of Germany, and claimed a certain jurisdiction over the Germanic body; but Napoleon compelled him to renounce this, and to content himself with the title of Em- peror of Austria. On the overthrow of Napoleon, however, he became president of the Diet. Bel- gium, which had long appertained to Austria, was lost during the war ; but she received, in compen- sation, the territory of Venice, 92. Austria consists now, within Germany, of Austria, Bohemia, and Moravia ; without it, of Hungary with its appendages, of Gallicia, and the Italian provinces of Venice and Lombardy. The population is about thirty-two millions. The Ca- tholic religion prevails, but there are many Protest- ants in Bohemia and Hungary. 93. The Archduchy of Austria lies in the south- Austria^ 3L cast of Germany, and consists of a fine plain, wa- tered by the Danube, and of the mountainous countries of Styria, Carinthia, Carnioia, Istria, and the Tyrol. These abound in minerals, particularly mercury. The chief cities are Vienna, the capital of the empire ; Lintz ; Gratz, the capital of Styria ; and Trieste, the only sea-port on the Adriatic. The peasantry of the Tyrol are distinguished for bravery and loyalty. Obt, Vienna lies on the S.W. side of the Danube, In a fer- tile plain. The manufactures are little remarkable, though some inland commerce is transacted an the noble stream of the Danube. Tne number of inhabitants exceeds 300,000. The suburbs are far more extensive than the city, standing at a considerable distance from the walls. The houses are gene- rally of brick, covered with stucco. The chief edifices are, the metropolitan church of St. Stephen, the imperial palace, library, and arsenal, the house of assembly for the states of Lower Austria, the council-house, the university, and some monasteries. The Prater, or imperial park, is the principal promenade and place of recreation. 94*. Bohemia and Moravia are fertile and highly cultivated countries, in the heart of Germany ; and Bohemia has extensive manufactures of linen and glass. It is surrounded by a circuit of mountains, which are rich in minerals. Prague, tlKe capital, is a handsome old city. 95. Hungary, to the east of Austria, is a large kingdom, containing about ten millions of inhabitants. It consists of a fruitful plain, watered by the Danube and many of its tributaries, and bounded on the north by the Carpathians. Its wines, especially Tokay, enjoy the highest reputation ; and the mines of Schemnitz and Cremnitz are among the richest in Europe. The nobility enjoy great privileges, and are a brave and honourable class of men ; but the peasantry are poor, and held in great subjection. Buda and Pesth, on opposite sides of the Danube, form the conjoint capital, though the states have 3'^ Turkey in Europe. often met at Presburg. TraiiRyWaiiia, on the cajit of Hungary ; Croatia, Sclavonia, and Dahnatia, on the south) are smaller countries^ also subject to Austria. 96. Gallicia forms an extensive plain on the south of Poland, which Austria has wrested from that country by successive partitions. It is gene- rally fruitful in ^rain, but rudely cultivated ; and all the branches of industry are in a depressed state. The salt mines of Wieliczca, however, arc the largest in the world, containing long ranges of apartments, and forming a sort of subterranean city. 97. Lombardy and Venice compose a territory of great extent and value, which forms part of Italy, and will be described along with that country. Extentf 300,000 square miles. Topviathnt 31,600,000 souls. TURKEY IN EUROPE. 98» Turkey in Europe is a very fine and fertile region, anciently very flourishing ; but, owing to the Mahometan religion, to the despotism of the go- vernment, and to the ignorant policy of the Turks> now declining and miserable. ^ Oh$* The government is despotic under the Grand Signlor, who is master of the lives and property of his subjects. The provinces are governed by pachas, many of whom are nearly independent of their imperial master. 99. The principal provinces are, Bulgaria, Ru- melia, which includes the ancient Macedonia and Thessaly, and the extensive territories which con- stitute Albania. The principalities of Moldavia, Wallachia, Bosnia, and Servia, along the Danube, are governed by princes appointed by the Porte, to \Yhom they pay tribute. HJO. The metropolis of Turkey is Constantuioplc, • ■ 1 ' ;/''V ^ ' *¥ t'V 'r.' finely Scao most Obi. hardly grand; narrow •trangc being a enclose bour et at 400, areTu nians, Scragli trance < name t 101 Turke listria, fortrei theDi 069. long lol and O classic 1 herinita 102 but ni Greec is Cai power The vcrnme power, Exit 103 aiicicij GfMC€» $3 finely situated in 41^ north latitude, between the Sea of Marmora and the Black Sea» and one of the most considerable cities in the world. Obi, The beautf of the lituation of Constantinople can hardly '*e eioeeded, the aspect from the sea being peculiarly grand ; but, on a nearer approach, the wooden hovels and narrow strecta disappoint the splendid expectations of the stranger. It forms an unequal triangle, resembling a harp, being about twelve or fourteen English miles in circumference, enclosed bv walls, and on two sides by the sea and the bar- hour called the Golden Horn. The inhabitants arc computed at 400,000, including the four suburbs. Of these 300,000 are Turks, 100,000 Greeks, and the remainder Jews, Arme- nians, and Franks. The most celebrated cdificen are the Seraglio, and tlie mosque of St. Sophia. The principal en- trance of the Seraglio is styled Capi, or the Porte, which gives name to its court and government. 101. Adrianople is the second city in European Turkey. Salonica has a great trade. Schumla, Si- listria, Nicopolis, and Belgrade are strong frontier fortresses. The chief river in European Turkey is the Danube. Obs, The chief moiintaine are, Haemus, or the Balkan, • long lofty range, which forms a barrier against Russia ; Pindua and Olympus, in Thessaly: Mount Athos, celebrated in classic history, ia now inhabited by a number of monks and hermits. 102. The Turkish islands were very numerous; but most of them are annexed to the new state of Greece, and the only important one which she retains is Candia, a fertile island, anciently celebrated and powerful under the name of Crete. The Turkish provinces generally, are under the local go- vernment ofpaehda, or viceroys ; who, having purchased tlieir power, use it to rob and oppress tlie inhabitants. Extent, 200,000 square miles. Flopulation, 9,545,SOa GREECE. 103. Greece, the most celebrated country of the ancient worlds has for many ages b^eu iji an op- 94 Rtpuhlk ffthi Seven iilamU.— France. prcMed and mUerable itato. It was respected b^^ the RomaiiB, ito first conquerors; but the Turks, who held it for three centuries, reduced it to a state of cruel bondage. Recently, however, the Greelcs made a bravo stand for their independence ; and, being supported by the great Christian powers, they )iai# compelled Turkey to withdraw her claims, and Aheir country has been formed into a small constitu- tional kinffdom. 104*. The new state of Greece comprehends tlie Morea (the ancient Peloponnesui), with the territory of the ancient Attica and Thebes, as far south as the Gulfs of Arta and Volo. It includes also the islands of Negropont, Hydra, and the Cyclades. The population is not supposed to exceed 700,000 ; but it is expected to increase under a free govern- ment Otho, prince of Bavaria, has been chosen king. 105. ^Athens, recently chosen as the capital, is still a considerable town, adorned with the most splendid ruins. Thebes, Corinth, and Sparta arc now only villages. The chief modern towns are Tripolizza, Napoli di Romania, Navarino, Patras, and Missolonghi. THE REPUBLIC OF THE SEVEN ISLANDS. 106. On the west of Greece lies the confederacy of the Seven Islands, consisting of Corfu, Santa Maura, Cephalonia, Ithaca, Zante, Cerigo, and Paxoiy having an independent government, but under the uiilitary protection of Great Britain. These islands are rugged but very fertile, abounding in fruit, cs- •^ecially currants, for which Zante is famous. FRANCE. 107. This extensive, fertile, and populous country occupies a commanding situation in the centre of Cf. 1^. ^. imJ tal, is most ta are IS are ^atrasy PAKIS Europ milita of its inhabi 108 tempe The a that 1101 th< Ohs. the rei Hclgiu 109 vinces iKvide the m< 110 Londc Many public embell splend riched amaissi theN< in 181 their 1 Obs. healthy thr^*^ p middle: is one built quays ; •elves, TheL ture; i mired ; Hospit France. 55 Europe ; and has always been distinguished by the military prowess of its armies, the intriguing spirit of its government, and the volatile character of its inhabitants. 108. France, being situated in the middle of the temperate zone, enjoys a mild and agreeable climate. The air in the south is considered so very salubrious, that it has become the resort of many invalids from uoithern countries. Obs, The population no\7 exceeds 32,900,000 ; but, during the reign of Napoleon, the French empire, comprehending Belgium and Piedmont, had more than forty millions. 109. France was formerly divided into 32 pro- vinces ; but since the revolution of 1789 it has been iKvided into 86 departments, named after the rivers, the mountains, or other remarkable features. 110. Paris is the largest city in Europe next to London. In 1827 it contained 890,000 inhabitants. Many of the streets are narrow and dirty, but the public structures are magnificent. Thitt city was embellished by the Emperor Napoleon with many splendid buildings and triumphal structures and en- riched with immense collections of works of art, amassed in Italy, Germany, Prussia, Holland, and the Netherlands ; but these, after the taking of Paris in 1815, were restored by the allied sovereigns to their lawful owners. Obs, Paris rises on both sides of the Seine, in a pleasant and healthy situation, with delightful environs. It is diyided into thr:?" parts ; the Town (ville) on the north, the City in the middle, and that part called the University on the south. It is one third smaller than London. The houses are chiefly built of freestone. The banks of the Seine present noble quays ; and the public buildings are not only elegant in them- selves, but are placed in open and commanding situations. The Louvre is among the best specimens of modern architefr* ture ; and the church of Ste. Genevieve is also deservedly ad- mired • nor must the Tuilleries, the Palais Royal, and the Ho^ital of Invalids be forgotten. Paris exceeds London in 36 France. magnificence, but yields to it in sice, cleanllrteob iii/i'ii, hililishrdi hy ti^mfnuin ,i' tV Puttrm 4,^iii0r' ■MMHIii 4' X*^ HtmfMmtffij 2* f»rroTCMt'orNTi|t« . n \tmliHk0mtr m ltimhm* u m U S tlrt^ -**!'' (hrAnn«MiH*» It |i DuHuuH I r»r4n«AwiufW*rWUn< IT Unnifiltiiirm *•' Jt^vonthtrm Vnrnwnll -ST -3» ■ WKLou ron»TiEs ninltltirm I i GtnUffttMshir^ T Uerinnrthahire h ' hnKktwektldnu 11 En^nwtd tn S.BaH^J)ury AFfBl^vmthf .^■dCttilft.-^-jliirT^TMMIU'r' twnt" 44 Great Britain and Ireland, enterprise of her people, have raised her to the highest pitch of greatness : her maritime power, her manufacturing industry, and her commerce with every quarter of tlie globe, are completely un- rivalled. 146. England is divided into forty counties or shires, and these counties are classed into six cir« cuits for the administration of justice. The coun- ties, thus classed, with their county or assize towns, are as under : ' — 1. Northern Circuit, Northumberland Newcastle . Durham Durham Cumberland Carlisle Wf.'stmoreland Appleby Yorkshire York Lancashire Lancaster. 2. Midland Circuit. Warwickshire Warwick Leicestershire Leicester Derbyshire Derby Nottinghamshire Nottingham Lincolnshire Lincoln Rutland , Oakham Northamptonsliirc Northampton. 3. Oxford Circuit, Oxfordshire Oxford Buckinghamshire Buckingham Gloucestershire Gloucester Worcestt '•shire Worcester Monmout. ishire Monmouth Ilerefords ;ire Hereford Shropshire Shrewsbury Staffordshire Stafford. 4. Norfolk Circuit, . - Bedfordshire Bedford Berkshire Reading Huntingdonshire... .4 «. Huntingdon Cambridgeshire Cambridge Great Britain and Ireland, 45 SuiTolk Ipswich Korfolk • Norwich. 5* Home Circuit ., / Chelmsford and "'*"' t. Colchester. Hertfordshire Hertford Kent .' Maidstone Surrey Guildford Sussex Lewes. 6. Western Circuit. -- , . f Winchester and I^*^P*»'« 1 Southampton Wiltshire Salisbury Dorsetshire Dorchester ' Somerset Wells Devon Exeter Cornwall Launceston, Bodmin Obi. Middlesex and Cheshire have distinct Courts of their own, and are called Counties Palatine. The counties of Dur. ham and Lancaster are also Palatine. 147. London, the metropolis of Great Britain, is in 51i° north latitude, and contains 1,400,000 in- habitants. It is the largest city, and the greatest seat of commerce, in the world. (See the Picture of London,) Oba, The principal towns in England are as under :— Bedfordshire contains Bedford, Woburn, and Dunstable. rsrhhire, Reading, Wmdsor, Newbury, Abingdon, Wal- lliii^ford. BvckingharMhire, Buckingham, Aylesbury, Newport Pagnel, Eton, Wycombe. Cambridgeshire, Cambridge, Ely, Wisbeach, Newmarket. Cheshire, Chester, Stockport, Macclesfield, Congleton, Nant* wich. Cornwall, Launccston, St. Ives, Penzance, Helstone, Fal- mouth, Penryn, Truro, Bodmin. Cumberland, Carlisle, Whitehaven, Workington, Coeker- mouth, Wipton, Penrith. Derbyshire, Derby, Chesterfield, Ashboiurn, Buztoii| J^i* lock. ' V 46 Great Rnuiin and Irdund, Devonahiret Exeter, Plymouth, Dcvonport, Sidinouth, Tops- ham, Teignmouth, Brixham, Dartmouth, Barnstaple. Soraetxhire, Dorchester, Poole, Weymouth and Lyme Regis, Blandford, Shaflesbury. Durhamt Durham, Sunderland, Stockton, Bishops-Auck- land, South Shields, Hartlepool, Darlington. Es»ext Chelmsford, Colchester, Harwich, Maldon, Coggles- hall. Witham. Gloucestershiref Gloucester, Bristol, Tewkesbury, Chelten- ham, Stroud, Cirencester. Hampshire^ Winchester, Portsmouth, Portsca, Southampton, Gosport, Lymington, Basingstoke, Ringwood, Newport, Cowes. HerefordshirCt Hereford, Ross, Leominster, Ledbury. Hertfordshire, Hertford, Royston, Hitchen, St. Albans, Ware. HuntingdonshirCt Huntingdon, St. Ives, St. Neot's, Ramsey, Kimbolton. Kenti Maidstone, Canterbury, Greenwich, Woolwich, Gravesend, Chatham, Rochester, Margate, Ramsgate, Sand- wich, Deal, Dover, Tonbridge, Dartford. Lancashirey Lancaster, Manchester, Liverpool, Preston, Wigan, Bolton, Warrington, Blackburn, Rochdale, Prescot. Leicestershire, Leicester, Hinckley, Loughborough, Lutter- worth, Melton-Mowbray, Harborough. Lincolnshire, Lincoln, Boston, Gainsborough, Louth, Stam- ford, Grantham. Middlesex, Londoni Westminster, Uxbridge, Brentford. Monmouthshire, Monmouth, Chepstow, Abergavenny. Nottinghamshire, Nottingham, Mansfield, Newark, Worksop. Norfolk, Norwich, Yarmouth, Lynn, Thetford. Northamptonshire Northampton, Daventry, Kettering, Pe- terborough. Northumberland^ Newcastle, Morpeth, Alnwick, North Shields, Hexham. Oxfordshire, Oxford, VWtney, Woodstock, Banbury, Henley. Rutland, Oakham, Uppingham. Shropshire, Shrewsbury, Bridgnorth, Oswestry, Newport, EUcsmere, Ludlow. • Somersetshire, Taunton, Bath, Bristol, Frome, Wells, Briogc- water. Staffiurdshire, Stafford, Lichfield, Burton, Newcastle under LyiJc, Wolverhampton. Swrey, Southwark, Guildford, Croydon, Farnham, King- ston, Ep^xnn/' Dorking. Great Britain and Ireland. 47 SuffiM, Ipflwich, LowcstofT, Bury St. Edinunds. SuMitx, Chichester, Hastings, Winchelsea, Arundel, Brigh. ton, Lewes, Horsham. Warwickshiret Warwick, Birminghaniy Coventry, Stratford. Weitmorelandt Appleby, Kendal. WilUhitet Salisbury, WiltoDi Devizes, Bradford, Trowbridge, Marlborough. WorceaterahirCt Worcester. Dudley, Stourbridge, Kidder« minster, Evesham. Y(yrkshire, York, Leeds, Hull, Sheffield, Whitby, Scarbo- rough, Ilippon, Halifax, Bradford, Wakefield, Huddersfield, I'oiUefract, Knaresborough, Harrowgate. 148. Manchester, Preston> Bolton, and Blackburn, are famous for cotton works* Birmingham, Sheffield, Dudley, and Wolverhamp- ton, for iron and steel goods. Leeds, Wakefield, Huddersfield, Halifax, and Exeter, for woollen cloth and stuffs. Norwich, Coventry, Macclesfield, and Spitalfields (London), for silks. Staffordshire and Worcestershire, for earthenware and china. Buckinghamshire and Bedfordshire, for lace. Nottingham, Leicester, and Mansfield, for stock* ings and lace. Wilton and Kidderminster, for carpets. Suffolk and Somersetshire, for linen cloth. Bridport and Plymouth, for coarse flax and hempen goods. Tin is the produce, of Cornwall ; lead and copper are furnished by the soatb-western counties, and by Derbyshire and Yorkshire. • Iron and coals abound in the northern counties and m Wales. Oh$. The inland watering places, famous for their salubrious springs, ar^, Bath, Cheltenham, Tunbridge, Harrowgate, Lea- mington, &c. The sea has places of resort for the sumiQcr season on all its coasts ; the principal of them are, Brighton, or Brighthclnistone, Margate, llamsgatc, Scarborougli, Wey- mouDi, DawLLsh, and Swunsoa. 48 Great Britain and Ireland, 149. The dock'i/ards for the navy are Ports- mouth, Plymouth, Chatham, Sheerncss, Woolwich, Deptford, and Milfbrd. Tlie trading ports arc, London, Liverpool, Bristol, Hull, Newcastle, Yar- mouth, Falmouth, Sunderland, Lynn, Swansea, Whitehaven, and Whitby. There are two archhishopricsy Canterbury and York ; and twenty-four bishopricsy including four Welsh bishoprics. The universities are Oxford and Cambridge. 150. The ptincipal rivers in England arc, the Se- vern, the Thames, the Trent, the Ouse, the H um- ber, the Tyne, the Mersey, and the Medway. Ob», The principal Lakes are Ulswater in Cumberland, Windermere in Westmoreland ; and Coniston, in Lancashire. 151. The Isle of Wight, on the Southern Coast, is famous for its picturesque beauty. Jersey, Guern- sey, Alderney, and Sark are populous small islands, near the coast of France. The Isle of Man is in the Irish Sea. The Scilly Islands stretch beyond the promontory of Cornwall. On the coast of Northum- berland lie Holy Island, and the Farn and Coquet Islands ; and in Kent are Thanet and Shoppey. The following details, chiefly abstracted from my British Geography* ought to be known and remembered by every British youth. London is in Latitude 51® 30' 49^^ ; Edingburgh, in 55° 57* 19"; Dublin in 53^ 23' 13*. The whole surface of England is 31,770,GI5 acres; of Wales, 5,313,785; of Scotland, 1D,2'14,3S8, and of Ireland, 19,274,000. The population, in 1831, of England, was 13,091,005; of Wales, 803,000 ; of Scotland, 2,30"5,930 ; and of Ireland, V34,365. In England there were 2,745,336 families, and of every 100 of them, 28 were employed in agriculture, 43 in trade, and 29 had no employment. ' In Scotland there were 50,231 families; and in every 100 of tliem, 25 were in agriculture, 41 in trade, and 34 in no em» ployment. and Inl Inl Tl inWl inilli{ TlJ in Sc| colU ChrccU Britain and Ireland. 49 xo There were in England^ in 1831, 3,3 26»022 inhabited hoiucf, and 113385 uninhabited. In Walei, \\5,5n*2 iiihnbttcd, and 6030 uninhabited. In Scotland, 3G9,393 inhabited, and 12,719 uninhabited. The cultivated land in England is about 26 millions of acres; in Wales, 3^ ; in Scotland, 5| ; and in Irehind, 12^ : in all, 47 millions of acres. Ttie annual taxes collected in England are about 42 millions, in Scotland 5, and in Ireland 4 millions. The expenses of collecting arc about 3]^ millions. There arc 24,500 trading ships, belonging to the United Kingdom, of 2j millions of tons, and navigated by lG5,000men and boys. The currency or money of the United Kingdom is from 25 to 30 millions of gold and silver coin, and 35 millions of bank tnd bankers* notes. The exports of the United Kingdom arc from 38 to 40 millions; the re-exports from 9 to 10 millions; and the in^ports arc rated at about 46 millions. The national debt is about 780 millions of various stocks, and the interest and charges arc about 28 \ millions. The regular army of England is about 8 1 ,000 men ; but the navy employed in peace is only 10 or 12 ships of the line, and twice as many frigates, sloops, ^c. The laws are made by the three estates in parliament, con- sisting of the King, 420 Peers, and 658 members of the House of Commons. The laws are administered by judges, magistrates, and juries of twelve sworn and upright men, who are required to be unanlrrMlis in their decision. Obi. The chief mountains and hills in England are, the Cheviot, between England and Scotland; Ingleborough and Wliarnside, in. Yorkshire ; Pendle, in Lancashire ; Skiddaw and Helvellyn, in Cumberl.-^nd ; Cotswold, in Gloucestershire ; Malvern, in "Worcestershire: Mendip, in Somersetshire; the Peak, in Derbyshire ; and the Wrekin, in Shropshire. \5*i' Wales, inhabited chiefly by a Celtic race, descended from the ancient Britons, most of whom still speak the Welsh language, is divided into twelve counties ; six north, and six south. 153« Wales is mountainous, with numerous rivers, and is a very picturesq'ie country, but less pro- -L 50 Great Dritain and Ireland* ductive than England. It is rich in mines of coal and copper, and has a inanuracturo of Hunnels, The Northern Counties art, Counttct, Chief Towns, Flintshire Flint, St. Asaph Denbighshire Denbigh, Wrexham, lilangoUen Caernarvonsliiro Caernarvon, Dangor, Conway Anglesey Deautnaris, Holyhead Merionethshire Harleeh, Hala Montgomeryshire Montgomery, Welshpool. The Southern Counties arc, Cardiganshire Cardigan, Abcrystwith Uadnorshire Radnor, Presteign T» , 1 I . r Pembroke, St. David's Haverford- Fembrokcshirc < . ' [_ west Cacrmarthcnshirc Caermarthen, Kidwelly Breeknockshirc Brecknock Glamorganshire CardiiF, Swansea, Merthyr Tydvil. Obs, The Island of Anglesey fiirms one of the Counties of Wales; and from Holyhead, on the western side of this island, is the common passage to Dublin. In the year 1831| Wales contained 805,236 iniiabitants. 154. Scotland is divided into thirty-three coun- ties, as under : — The Northern Counties are ten. Shtres, Chief Towns, Orkney Kirkwall Lerwick Caithness Wickf Thurso Sutherland Dornoch Ross Tain, Dingwall • ' " Cromarty Cromarty Nairn.. Nairn ^ Moray, or Elgin Elgin, Forres *^ Ranft' Banff, Cullen * *^^ Aberdeen Aberdeen, Peterhead ' -> Inverness Inverness, Fort George* The Middle Counties are nine. "^ Perth Perth, Crieff, Dunkeld Angus Forrar,Dundee,Montrose, Arbroath Meains, or Kincardine.. Rcrvie Argylc Invcrary, Campbclltown Dumbarton Dumbarton SUrlifig Stirling, Falkirk, Bannockfafuni Ai^ •»/ i ,|*%, m 4- ♦ .* ' ^^'-11 ■ K- -.1 .f ■ V 'III, :!' ^"♦l n i' p t^ n L 1 N ^ Great Britain and Ireland* f | rinckmannan Clnckmannan, AIIoa KiiiioM KinruKv pi<. r Cupar, St. Andrew*!, Kirkolclj * * \ Dunfcriulinc. The Southern Counties aru fourteen. Bute UothMy, LamliUih Ucnfrcw { ^^*-'"^'"*-'''^» Or*?«nock, Paltlty, Port '**'V 1. GIaRp;ow Lanark Gia«tgow, Lanark, Hamilton Linlithgow , , Linlithgow, Ho'nen Edinburgh I EJ|;j{|JJJKN Lcith, Dalkeith, Mu». Haddington Haddington, Dunhur Peehlefl Peebles Berwick Greenlaw, Dunne, Lauder Ayr Ayr, Kilinarnoek, Irvhie Wigton Wigton, Stranraer, Portpatrick Kirkcudbright Kircudbright, Castle Douglas Dumfries Dumfries, Annan, Sanquhar Selkirk Selkirk Roxburgh Jedburgh, Kelso, Hawick, Melrose* 155. Scotland is distinguished for eminence in literature, and has four universities, those of Edin- burgh, Glasgow, Aberdeen, and St. Andrew's. 156. Scotland is, to a great extent, mountainous, and unfit for tillage, but some districts are highly cul- tivated. Oats are the chief grain; sheep and cattle are abundantly reared, and sent to England. There are extensive manufactures of cottonand linen, the former chiefly at Glasgow and Paisley, the latter at Dundee and Dunfermline. The herring, cod, and whale flsh- eries are considerable on the north and west coasts. 157* Scotland is divided into two parts, the Low- lands and the Highlands ; the latter of which is in- habited by a Celtic race, who retain a peculiar language and dress. The Scots bear the character of being enterprising, active, and intelligent. The population, in 1831, amounted to 2,365,807. 158. The islands adjoining Scotland, are Shet- Iand» the Orkneys, the Hebrides (^Hebudes)^ or F 2 I IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) O ^^s 1.0 I.I Uillft 125 |J0 "^^ ■■■ ^ Ui 1 22 us 140 ■ 2.0 ^ m\)^^ ^ 6" ^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STRiET WEBSTER, N.Y. USSO (716)872-4503 s? iV \\ V o\ '^ "^^^ ^^ Greai Britain and Ireland. Western Islands, aiid those of A mm and Bute, which form one of the counties. 159. The lakes are numerous, and very pictu* resque; the chief are Loch Lomond, Loch Ness, Loch Tay, Loch Broom, Loch Awe, and Loch Katrine. The highest mountains are the Gram- pians, the most elevated of which is Ben Nevis; abo Benwyvis, Benmacdui, and Caimgorum. 160. Ireland is divided into four large Pro- vinces; viz., Ulster northward, Leinster eastward, Munster southward, and Connaught westward ; and contained in 1831, 7,767,400 inhabitants The Province of Leinster contains twelve Counties. We.tMe.th{ 5*£f King*s County Philipstown Queen's Co. Maryborough Kilkenny...... Kilkenny Kildare NaasandAthy Carlov Carlow. Dublin .. Louth. ... Wicklow.... Wexford .. Longford East Meaih Dublin Drogheda Dundalk Wicklow Arklow Wexford Longford Trim The Province of Ulster contains nine Counties. ^^^ { Esr"«" Tyrone Omagh Fermanagh ... Enniskillen Donegal Lifford. T\ . f Downpatrick •••••• 1^ Kewry Armagh Armagh Monaghan Monaghan Cavan CavaiL*^ Londonderry.. Deny/ The Province of Connaught contains five Counties. Sligo Sligo Gtdway Galway l^ieitrim LeitriiQ Rowommon... Roscommon Mayo • Newport The Province of Munster contains six Counties. Limerick ...... Limerick Tipperary ..... Clonrael Waterford Waterford. Clare. Ennis Cork CorkyKinsale •, f Tralee ^®"7 \ Killamcy 161* The northern division of the island, which is inhabited chiefly by Protestant Dissenters, has ex^ tensive and valuable manufactures of linen. Of the population of Ireland a very small proportion \ Summary of Europe. Xh ch n- s; 'O- •d, nd hy IS IS DO o^rtioD are of the Established Church, the larger proportion being Catholics or Protestant Dissenters. 162. Dublin is the capital, and contains the only university. Cork, Londonderry, Limerick^ Water- ford, and Belfast are famous as ports and as places of trade. The principal rivers are, the Shannon, the Blackwater, the Boyne, and the Liifey. The prin- cipal lakes are Neagh, Erne, and Killamey« 163. Ireland is a fertile country, and exports large quantities of grain, live stock, salted beef, pork, and linen. SUMMARY OF EUROPE. SUtat. Russia.. 1 Poland jBweden andC Norway.... \ DeninarK...M*<* l*rustia.... Austrian Empire.. Great Bri. tain and irdand i^in.. Portuffd.!.... Turlcey ii^ Europe..... France ••«>... JioUand |Bclgiura t •••#•••••«• { Chief Cities. i St. Peters- ) burg and Moscow Warsaw.., Stockholm & Christiania C... 'Hanover, Bavaria.. Wirtemberg... Switaerland. Sardinia ........ Panna and ) Plactntia..3 Tuscany Pkpal iSomi. I nioDa.....M 3 T wo«c Uii..^ Oreece .•••.....« Madrid UstMn.. ...... Constant!* nople Paris. Amsterdam Brussels Dresden..... Hanover..... Munich Stutgard Berne. Tufin PamuutM...* FliNrence..... Home. Extent in 1 Square 'Populatioa Mil(«k ' 1,650,000 47.000 |S40,000 83.000 104,656 900,000 83,385 } Nulea... Athens.. 171,627 40,875 £00,000 800,000 13,000 11,000 7,188 14,570 43,900 8,000 18,670 87,000 8,300 8,500 17,000 49,500 8,000 58,000,000 4,000,000 3,914,U63 8,093,300 13,094,540 32,071,935 84»044,9lV' 14,000,000 3,683,000 9,545,300 38,897,158 8,600.000 4,000,000 1,500,000 1,300,000 4.000,000 1,500,000 8,000,0(0 4,000,000 380,000 1,300,000 2,485,000 7,287,000 Religion. Greek Cb. Roman Ca. Lutheran... Lutheran.... Luth. & Ca. Roman Ca. Prot ft Ca. Catholic ...... Catholic ... {Mahom^l tanisro S Catholic. Oovem* ment Protestant... Catholic Lutheran.... Lutheran., Catholic... Lutheran..;. ProtftCa. Catholic Catholic.., Catholic Catholic.., CathoHc. 700,000 Greek dl.. Despotic Despotic. Lim. Mon. Monarchy, Monarchy. Monarchy. Lim. Mon. Monarchy. Mona«ch)r. Despotic. Lim. Moa Lim. Mon. Urn. Mon. Monarchy. Lim. Mon. Lim. Mon. Urn. Mon. l^ed. Ren. Monarchy. Monarchy. Monarchy. Monarchy. Monarchy. Urn. Mon. I F J 54 Asia. Obt, Dispoiitm Implies that the will of the monaroh it the leir ; monarthj^t that he governs according to established laws and eii^ins ; limited monarchy, as in England, indicates some ehtok on the power of the nsonarch, as in the Houses of Iiords Md Commons, and the Jury system. ASIA. r 164. ASiA is the most extensive quarter of the Old World, lying to the east of Europe and Africa. Its plains, mountains, and rivers are peculiarly grand and extensive. The climate and soil are extremely various, but the southern regions are singularly fertile, abounding in rice, sugar, and many rich aromatics. Obt, 1. Asia is bounded on the North by the Northern Ocean, on the South by the Indian Ocean, on the East by the Pacific Ocean, on the West by Europe, the Black Sea, the Mediterranean, and the Red Sea. 2. The Christian religion, though first implanted in Asia, has been chiefly promulgated by European ^nations. The Asiatics are mostly Mahometans or Pagans, and, among the latter, idola- try exhibits a different form in almost every country. In Thibet, the Grand Lama is worsliipped ; in China, the deism of Con fudus prevails ; and in India, Bramah is the object of worship, in connection with many superstitions. 165. Asia made a conspicuous figure in the early history of the world, and was the seat of the great empires of Babylonia, Assyria, and Persia. It has suffered severely from the predominance of super* stition, as well as from conquest and despotism ; so that its states are now inferior in power, knowledge^ and civilisation to the Christian states of E«\rope. 166. The principal governments of Asia are those of Russia, Turkey, China, Persia, Hindostan, or India, and Japan. In this quarter of the globe the boundaries or states arc continually changing, from listlic lawi some iLorda JLmUl w » «iOfoo» Kcsho^ and Saigon. China Pekin, Nankin, and Canton. Japanese Empire Jeddo and Meaoo. Eastern Arehipelago..* Batavia, Manilla. 167* The principal islands in the Asiatic seas, besides those of Japan and the ArchipeWo, ar^" Behring*s, the Kuriles, Saghalien, the isles of Jesso, of Formosa, Hainan, Andaman, NicofoaT) Ceylon^ the Maldives, and the Laccadives. 168. The oceans and seas adjoining Asia are, the Northern, Pacific, and Indian Oceans ; the Black, Red, Arabian, Chinese, and Yellow Seas ; the Sean of Kamtschatka, Okhotsk, and Corea ; the gulfs of Persia, Siam, and Tonquin ; the Bay of Bengal, the Levant, and the Archipelago. Obi. The Caspian Sea, bounded on the south by Persia, is properly an immense lake, having no connsction with any other portion of water. So is the Aral; to the epalt of it. M Asiatic Turkey. 169. The principal straits of Asia are, Beli ring's, leparating it from America; the Straits of Malacca of Sunda» between Java and Sumatra; of Ormus, at the mouth of the Persian Gulf; and of Babel- mandeby which form the entrance to tlie Red Sea from the Indian Ocean. 170. The chief rivers of Asia are, the Kiang Ku and Hoans Ho, in China ; tlic Lena, Yenisei, and Obi, in Siberia ; the Amoor and Oxus, in Tartary ; the Burrampooter, the Ganges, and the Indus, in India ; and the Tigris and Euphrates in Turkey. 171* The principal Asiatic mountains are, the Hi- malaya, nortli of Bengal, 28,000 feet high, and the loftiest in the world ; the Uralian, the Altaian, the Sayansk, the Alak, the Taurus, the Ghauts of Hin- dostan, the Caucasian, and Ararat, near the Caspian Sea. ASIATIC TURKEY. 172. Asiatic Turkey consists of a range of beau- tiful and fertile countries, once rich and flourishing, and the theatre of the greatest events in ancient his- tory. At present, however, Turkish oppression and anarchy have reduced them to a state of poverty and insignificance. 173. The principal divisions of Asiatic Turkey are, Asia Minor, Syria, Palestine, Armenia, and Irak- Arabi. These are subdivided into pash^lics, go- verned by pashas appointed by the Grand Signior, but who often assume independent power. Syria, Palestine, and a part of Asia Minor have recently fallen under the power of the Pashd of Egypt, and are likely to be much improved by his active admi- nistration. 174. The mountains and rivers of Asiatic Turke*y are much celebrated in history. The principal Asiatic Turkey, 67 mountains are, Taurus and Olympus, in Asia Minor ; Ararat in Armenia; Lebanon, \u Syria; Hermon and Tabor, in Palestine. Tlie chief rivers are, the Euphrates, the Tigris, the Orontes, and the Jordan. The principal lalces are, Asphaltites, or the Dead Sea, and Tiberias, anciently the sea of Galilee; both in Palestine. 175. Asia Minor is a mountainous territory, with high table-lands in the interior, and rich plains on the sea-coast Smyrna, the capital, is the chief seat of the Levant trade, and from it are exported fine carpets, silk, goats* hair, rhubarb, oil, and fruits. The other great cities, in which were the seven churches of Asia: Pergamus, Thyatira, Sardis, Ephesus and Laodicea, now Latakio, are mostly dis- tinguished by splendid ruins. Bursa, Konieh, Tocat anu Sivas are now the chief inland cities. 176. Syria, a mountainous but very fruitful coun- try, has suffered much from anarchy, but is now possessed by the Pasha of Egypt. A number of independent tribes inhabit the heights of Lebanon. Antioch, the ancient capital of the East, is much decayed : but Damascus and Aleppo are still great and flourishing cities. There are magnificent ruins of the Temple of the Sun at Balbec, and of the ancient city of Palmyra, on the borders of the desert. 177* Palestine, the ancient Judea, is distin- guished as the theatre of the miracles and great events of Scripture history. Though mountainous, and in many parts rugged, it has many fertile dis- tricts,, which were anciently weU cultivated, but are now nearly deserted. Oh», Jerusalem is still a considerable eity, and contains two ^IcntUd edifices, the nio!' 'ue of Omar, and the church of the Holy Sepu]cl)re. Acre, Jaffa (the ancient Joppa), and Napo- lose, near the ancient Sainaria, are still places of consequence. Bethlehem, Nazaretli, Jericho, are villages visited on account of their connection with events in the life of our Saviour. 58 AsUUw RUMMU 178. Armenia, including Diarbekir and Kurdi- •tan» ii a high mountain territory, on the upper course of the Euphrates and Tigris, ffrcat part of which is held by independent and plundering trib<*{i, or is disputed by Persia, on which it borders. The chief cities are Trebisond, Erzeroum, and Mosul, near which last are the remains of the ancient Nineveh. 179. Irak-Arabi, the plain between the Euphrates and Tigris, was celebrated aef the seat of the empire of Babylon, and afterwards of tha.caliphate of Bag- dad ; but since it was subjected toHflHQsh dominion, it has lost its greatness. Bagdad lri|9t a consider- able citv, at some distance from which ase vast piles of bricks and rubbish, the remains of the ancient Babylon. The foreien trade is carried on at Bas- lora, at the head of the Persian Gulf. 180. The chief islands are Cyprus, Rhodes, Scio, S&mos, Cos or Stanco, and Mitylene. These islands, mostly inhabited by Greeks, are very fruitful, but have suffered much from Turkish oppression. RUSSIA IN ASIA. 181. Russia in Asia consists of two entirely dis- tinct parts, Siberia, and the countries on the Caspian. Siberia is divided into two great governments, that of Tobolsk in the west, and Irkutsk in the east. It was conquered by Russia about a century and a half ago, and in a great measure peopled by cri- minals sent thither into exile. 06«. This vast extent of land, containing three millions and ft half of square miles, is not supposed to contain above two millions of barbarous inhabitants, chiefly Tartars, and others called Tchuvashes, Votiaks, Ostiaks, Voguls, Tungusiaiis, and Kamtschatdales. 182. The principal cities in Siberia are Tobolsk and Irkutsk. The north produces only valuable 7%i VhintH Empir$, 59 Curdi- upprr art of tribo«, Tho foaul, ncient iratcii mpire Bag- inion, tidcr- ; piles icient Bas- Scio, land^, I, but Aifi and skint ; but in the south are some com lands and very rich pasturages. The Obi is tlic chief river ; the Irtysh, the Lena, and the Yenisei, are also very considerable. 183. The Kurile Islands are a considerable group belonging to Asiatic Russia, extending to the south f rom iCamtschatka. The sea north of Siberia is filled with ice, and is commonly unnavigable. 184. The countries on the Caspian, and extending to the Black sea, are chiefly Astrachan, Georgia, and Circassia. The last two are traversed by the great mountain range qf Caucasus, the highest pinnacle of which, Elbourt, ini6,000 feet high. In iU heighU are many rude independent tribes. The Circos- ftian#are celebrated for the bravery of the men and the beauty of the females. Numerous slaves of both sexes are imported from these countries into Persia and Turkey. 185. The chief cities are Astrachan and Derbend on the Caspian ; and Tefflis, the capital of Georgia. Most of Uiia territory has been conquered from Persia. 18 and Hhers S and K)]8k lable THE CHKNI8B EMPIRE. 186. China is celebrated for the great antiquity of its government ; for its crowded population, its fine manufactures, and some peculiar productions ; for the extent of its canal navigation ; and for its jealous and exclusive commercial policy. All travellen in China have eipressed their astonishment at the vast population. The precise amount, however, is very variously stated. Recent estimates by Morrison and Klaproth, founded* on official publications, made it about 150 millions; while a stiU later one in the Anglo- Chinese calendar purport* ing alM to be official, raises it to S60 millions. The truth probably lies between these extremes, and China may contain Irom SOO to 300 millions of inhabitants. The populatkm ol eo Th§ Chinem Emptre. iti Tnrtar dominioiii it ■till more unoerUin* bu« may be etU* mated «t from 8 to 10 milUone. 187* This empire consists of three great divisions; ▼is., 1. China Proper. 2. Chinese Tartary; giidy 8. Thibet. — The peninsula of Corea is tribu- tary to China. . Ohi. From east to west the Chinese dominiont extend 4900 British voileB, and from north to south 2000 miles. It pos- sesses every variety of climate, from tJiat of the north of England Cothatof the West Indies. • 188. China Proper is bounded by the Chinese Sea on the south, the Pacific Ocean on the east, Thibet and Tartary on the west and north. The chief cities are, Pekin, Nankin, and Canton : but it contains 40 or 50 of great extent, and vast popu- lation ; and many hundreds of secondary magnitude, equal to our largest towns. Ob»> 1. Near Pektn is the imperial palace, consisting of many extensive buildings, with ornamental gardens, so beautl- All as to appear the work of enchantment. Pekin occupies a large space of ground, but the streets are wide, and the houses iddom exceed one story. The length of what is called the Tartar city is about four miles, and the suburbs are consider- able. The houses, indeed, are neither large nor numerous ; but by their neatness, with that of the shops, delight the eye of the visiter. The walls of this capital are of considerable strength and thickness, and have sixteen gates of elegant architecture. The population by the best estimate is two millions. Nankin is a still greater city, its walls being seventeen miles round. Canion is the only port in which Europeans are allowed to establish factories; and from hence is brought tea, to the ' annual amount of about twenty- five millions of pounds by the English, ten millions by the other nations of Europe, and seven millions by the Americans. The great canal, above 500 miles long, of greater widt& than any in Europe, is said to have had 30,000 men employed ibrty-tluiee years iq completing it. Every province also has its eanal, with branches to each town and larg^ village. Th^ grent wall is the most prodigious work of art inthe worU, and was built two thousand years ago, to protect China froip the invasions of the Tartars. It b carried over mountains 5000 ■■§ ->-,. •"■%■ *. ■*f The Chtne$e Empire. dl feet higbi acroM vallejrsy and on arches over riven. In many important passe* it is doubled and trebled. At eyery hundrod yards is a tower or bastion. It is in general twenty-five feet high, and fifteen thick. 189. China produces abundance of rice, tea, and fruit ; and is famous for its ingenious manufacture! of silks, porcelain, earthenware, paper, &c. Ohi, Besides the export of teas, porcelain, silks, and other articles from Canton, the Chinese send numerous large junks to Japan and the oriental islands. They also carry on a vast inland trade between their provinces by canals; and they cultivate every acre of ground with singular profit and neat- ness. The Ua tree is the singular and most valuable plant in China : it is an evergreen shrub, and grows to the size, and much in the form, of our gooseberry bush; the leaves are gathered at difibrent seasons, and thus form varieties for our teas ; the finer sorts require extraordinary care in drying and preparing for sale, and some are dyed, to give them a stronger colour. 190. The chief rivers of China are the Hoan-ho, and the Kian-ku or Yang-tse-kiang, each about 2000 miles long, and among the largest in the world. A vast number of Chinese live in covered boats, on these rivers, and on the innumerable canals, as on land. 191. Chinese Tartart extends both to the north and west of China, and is bounded by Siberia on the north, Independent T9rtary on the west, and Thibet on the south. 192. It is inhabited, chiefly, by the MandshuiilUnd Mongols ; of whom the former conquered China in 1644, and still govern the empire. A great part of it is covered by the sandy desert of Shamo or Cobi ; 6ut Little Bucharia, immediately west of China, is traversed by chains of mountains, inclosing many fertile regions, of which the chief are Cashgar, Khoten, and Hami, with capitals of the same names. Yarkund is the great seat oi inland trade. o •1 ;. wj ,.-'*< es The Chineu Empire. Oht. The Mongols are a wandering, paitoral, warlike racei with broad facet and high cheek-bones. From their country came the ancient Huns ; and» under the standard of Zingis Khan, their ancestors conquered the greater part of Asia and the east of Europe. The Mongols are rather allies than sub* Jects of China. 193. Thibet is an extensive table-land to the north of Hindostan, lying beyond the Himalaya chain and between it and the Holkoun chain, in a bleak and rugged elevation. Its chief town is Lassa, where resides the grand Lama or spiritual sovereign oi these regions in a splendid palace 367 feet high, and containing 10,000 apartments. Ohi, This theological person is said to have the soul of his predecessor in a new body, and the influence of this supersti- tion prevails through vast countries, and extends to China. There are even subordinate Lamas; but since 1791 when tlie Chinese took possession of Thibet, they have exercised all civil authority. One Lama, called the Tashoo, resides near the Bengal frontier with a population of nearly 4000 priests. 194*. The Chinese islands are very numerous, and scattered along the southern and eastern coast. The largest are Taywan or Formosa, and Hainan. 195. The islands of Loo-choo, a considerable group, subject to China, are noted for the courteous and amiable character of the people. 196. By very ancient policy, all foreigners are excluded from China ; and a very restricted inter- course is permitted only at Canton, a port in the South, and at Maimatchin, a fortress on the Siberian frontier. They consider all other nations as bar- barians, and themselves the first inventors and artists, having, in fact, known block-printing, the compass, gunpowder, &c. in remote ages. Ohi, Chinese authentic history extends to about 2000 b. c, and the same government has subsisted, with a few changes of dynasty, llie state religion is pure deism ; and the sovereign Japan* 63 is regarded as God's representative, and the father of the n»> tion : but other religions and many gross superstitions prevail. Knowledge is the sole title to office and distinction, and all aspirants undergo rigid examinations. The royal rerenue is one tenth of the produce of the land, received in kind. Altogether, China is the most original and remarkable na- tion on the globe. JAPAK. 197. The Japan islands form an extensive, rich, populous and remarkable empire. The largest is Niphon ; and the chief towns are, Jeddo ; Meaco, the spiritual capital ; and Nangasaki. 198. This empire trades only with the Chinese, and prohibits all other foreign intercourse under pain of death. The Dutch are only allowed to send an annual ship to Nangasaki. 199. The religion of the Japanese is idolatrous. The government is a monarchy, restrained by the priesthood. 0&5. The Japanese language is so peculiar, that it is rardy understood by the people of other nations. The sciences are deservedly esteemed among the Japanese, who have schools for rhetoric, arithmetic, poetry, history, astronomy, &c attended by no fewer than from 3000 to 4000 scholars each. 200. Jeddo, the capital, is reported to be about twenty miles in circumference, and to be as populous 2& Pekin. The population of the whole empire has been stated at thirty millions, but may be estimated, with greater probability, at twenty millions. The ' arts and sciences are much cultivated. Their rich lacquered cabinets prove the superior ingenuity of the people. In other respects their manufactures are inferior to those of China. 201. The climate is fine, the face of the country beautiful, and agriculture is held in high estimatibn. G 2 ^ India beyond the Ganges. In all respects Japan is a great and interesting empire; but, holding no intercourse, it is little known to foreign nations : byecause the government permits no intercourse except vvitli the Chinese, and a very restricted one with the Dutch. Ohi> Other islands of Asia arc, J*tiso^ to 'which Europeans trade for furs, and which is partly subject to Japan ; Macaot lying in the bay of Canton, belonging to the Portuguese ; and the island of Saghalien, or Tchoka, belonging to Chinese Tartary. . ll :.« I INDIA BEYOND THE GANGES. 202. Under this general name is comprehended an immense country on the east of the Bay of Bengal, which may be divided into the British territories, the Birman empire, Siam, and the empire of Anam or Cochin-China. 1. The British Territories were obtained by treaty in 1826, after the successful war against the Birmans. They consist of Assam, Arracan, Mergui, and Tenasserim, which, with Malacca, obtained from the Dutch in 1824?, in exchange for some districts in the islands, comprehend nearly the whole east- em coast of the Bay of Bengal. They are in many parts fertile, but rudely cultivated. Obs, On a small island at the southern extremity, Britain has founded the town of Sincapore, which has become remark- ably flourishing, and a grea part of the trade of the suiTound- ing countries centres in it. She has also founded Amherst Town, in Tenasserim ; and has a settlement at Prince of Wales Island, near Malacca. • 2. The Birman Empire consists of the kingdoms of Ava and Pegu, and was very powerful, till hum- bled in the late contest with T^ritain. It is traversed from north to south by the great river Irawaddy ; and the territory is productive, particularly in teak timber, a valuable species, more *iurable than the "•W'fw ^mw. H,'- --TtiP '"F #^ "^'^ — ''^^' .^^'^^^'^ '^^ v^Sf^ a i,7; ^■: "■'imi"' ^Vrf^1*tWt Q'UEBEC ^SHINGTOli' f 1> :;r* M |tev. Lidia btf/oftd the Ganges, 65 » K European oak. The Birmans, unlike the Hindoosi are brave, lively, and inquisitive. Ob9, Tlieir religion and literature are entirely different, belonginff to the system of Boodh, whose votaries were long ago expelled from Hindostan. The chief military force con- sists in war-boata well armed, which ficrht in the channel of the river. Ummorapoora was the capitid till Utely, when the seat of government was transferred to Ava. At Pego and other cities are most splendid pagodas, having their rooi^ adorned with gold. 3. Si AM consists of a fertile valley between two ranges of mountains, and watered by the noble river Meinani. It is well fitted for sugar, rice, and other tropical products, but the cultivation and trade are chiefly in the hands of the Chinese. Bankok, the capital, at the mouth of the Meinam, consists in a great measure of houses floating in the water. The elephants of Siam are famed for their size and beauty. 4. The eastern countries of Cambodia, Tsiompa, and ToNQuiN, have all, within the last thirty years, been subjected by Cochin-Chin A or Anam. The king of that country, having been driven for some years into exile, obtained the assistance of some French officers, through whom he formed a navy and army on the European plan, and thus achieved all those conquests. The chief river is the Maykaung, which flows through Cambodia. The forests are very extensive, and contain many trees yielding rich gums, particularly that called gamboge. '• 203. Tonquin is the most fertile and populous of these countries ; and its capital, Kesho, the largest of the cities ; but both are little known. The resi- dence of the sovereign is at Hue-foo, in Cochin- China ; but Saigong, in Tsiompa, is the chief seat of foreign trade. Jjaoi \s a mountainous country in the interior^ o 3 66 Uindoitan. partly subject to Anam, partly ruled by independent chiefs. 204. Opposite to the coast of Malacca are the islands of Andaman and Nicobar, inhabited by an almost savage race of people. A British settlement was formed on the great Andaman, of convicts from Bengal ; but it has been given up, on account of the unhealthiness of the climate. HINDOSTAN. 205. This region has been celebrated from the earliest ages as the most beautiful and fertile in Asia, and perhaps in the world. It produces, in the greatest abundance, rice, sugar, cotton, opium, in- digo, and pepper. It has mines of the finest dia- monds, and yields also rubies and other precioub stones. The population amounts to nearly 140 mil- Kons, of whom nine tenths are either subjects, allies, or tributanes of Great Britain. 206. India is formed by nature into three great divisions : — . 1. The mountain territory along the whole northern fron- tier, consisting of the heights and slopes of the Himalaya, now ascertained to contain the loftiest summits on the globe, some of them being above five miles in height, and covered with perpetual snow. The valleys between their successive ridges are narrow, but many of them fertile and beautiful. 2. The great central plain of Hindostan Proper, watered by the Ganges and the Indus, two of the largest rivers in Asia, with their tributaries. It is the finest part of India, and one of tlie most firuitful and populous regions in tlie world. 3. The southern peninsula, stretching in a triangular form into the Indian Ocean, terminating in a point at Cape Co- roorin. High ranges of hills, called the Ghauts, run parallel to the coast ; the eastern Ghauts to that of Coromandel, and the western to that of Malabar. The interior consists of the very elevated table>lands of the Deccan and Mysore. Thia r^on is fertile, though not equally so with the Gangetic pro- Ilittdottan, n ^inoea ; yet iti hills produce tlie pepper, and conUln the priiw f ipal diamond mines. 207. Hindostan was for several centuries the seat of the Mogul empire, cstabliBhed bv conquest from Tartarv and Afghanistan, and considered the most powerful and splendid in the East. Within Uie last century its power was extinguished by the rise of the independent Mahratta chiefs, and the re- bellion of its own nabobs or governors ; but jthese new princes, having involved themselves in contests with Britain, have yielded to the superiority of her arms and councils, and have mostly been reduced to a state either of subjection or vassalage. The Great Mogul still resides at Delhi, under British protection. Ob§. About seven eighths of the great population of India eonsisti of native Hindoos ; a peculiar race, of black complex- ion, but small and elegant forms and features, and of mild and polished manners. They have many learned books written in the Sanscrit, an ancient and now dead language. They are ex- tremely superstitiou!^, worshipping a triple deity, Brahma, Vishnu, and Siva, with various subordinate powers, and even rivers and animals. Tliey go in vast crowds on pilgrimages, often of more than a thousand miles, to their favourite shrines, •s those of Hurdwar, Benares, and Juggernaut They are also impelled by fanaticism to strange and barbarous deeds, throwing themselves under the wheels of their sacred chariots, or drowning themselves or their chtUlren in the Ganges; widows, also, have been accustomed to bum themselves on the funeral pile of their husbands : but these enormities are nqw studiously prevented by the British government. The Hin- doos have also been formed by superstition into classes, or castes, the higher among whom will not cat or speak with those of inferior condition. These castes are, in the order of their dignity, the Brahmins, or priests ; the Cshatryas, or soldiers ; the Vaisyas, or tradesmen ; and the Soodras, or labourers. The Hindoos have peaceably obeyed the successive nations by whom they have been conquered, provided they were allowed to retain tiieir own religion and institutions. The remaining eighth part of the population consists of the conquering races of Tartars and Afghans, who brouglit with them the profession 68 Ilindostam, of th« Mahometan religion. The number t:^ Europeanii h jtny small, though they are now nearly mantere of tlie eountry. 208. Hindostan, qb now governed, may be divided into the territories immediately ruled by Britain, thoie held by her voAsals and tributaries, and the few which still remain independent. 209. India, under British government, is divided into three presidencies: Calcutta, Madras, and Bombay. 210. The presidency of Calcutta includes the provinces of Bengal, Bah^r Allahabad, Agra, ami Delhi. It thus comprises ai! the territory watered by the Ganges a;«d the Jiimna, and the mountain districts in which cheir sources are situated. It comprehends the most fruitful of the plains of In- dia, and is also the seat of its finest manufactures. Calcutta is now the largest city, ranliing as the capital of India. Obt. The government house and the mansions of wealtliy individuals are exceedingly splendid ; but the native quarter, or blaelc town, as usual in India, consists of miserable hovels, arranged in narrow, confined, and crooked streets, llic city contains, however, a number of intelligent and c^nlent natives. In this presidency are oIm) Agra and Delhi, the successive 'sapiuls of the Mogul emperors, and still adorned with their splendid palaces and tom^s ; Btrnares, the chief seat of Hindoo religion and learning ; and Dacca, where the finest muslins in the world arc manuiactured. 211. The presidency of Madras comprises the greater part of the coast of Coromandel, including the Carnatic, the Circars, and various other detach^id districts. Madras is a large city, though not equal to Calcutta. Arcot is the capital of the Carnatic ; Tanjore is a flousishing city, with a splendid pagoda : and Masulipatam is the chief t>eat of the manufac- tures of calicoes and ginghams. 212. Bombay is the smallest of the presidencies, consisting of various detached districts in the west nindosean. 69 of India. Tho city of that name, situatt^ on an island, is the scat of a great trade, carried on both by British and Panee nierchautik In thii presidency are also Surat, the most flourishing and commercial city of western India ; Canibay, Uie metropolis of the fine province of Guzerat ; and Poomi)i| lately the capital of the Mahratta coiifi^dcracy. Obi, I1ie population of the thrc« priMdoncies is «ftJnnftt«d •t ninety miUione. 213. The powers held in vassalage by Britain arc chiefly the following : •^- 214. The Nizam, or Soubah of the JDeccan, who governs the ereater part of that southern table-land so called. H vdrabad, his capital, is a verv large city, at which a British force is constantly sta- tioned. 215. The Riyah of Mt/sore. This country is a high and fertile table-land, containing the strong cities of Seringapatam and Bangalore. ltd former rulers, Ilyder and Tippoo, were the most inveterate enemies of Britain ; but after a bloody struggle the latter was vanquished, and his posterity dethroned. 216. Of the Mahratta princes, the Rajah of Sattaroy descended from the original founder of the confederacy, had been dethroned and imprisoned by his generab ; but Britain, after overcoming them, drew him from confinement, and assigned to him a considerable territory. The Rajah of Berar resides at Nagpoor, and is a determined enemy of Britain, but reduced to complete subjection. The same may be said of the once powerful and turbulent house of Holkar, who are still allowed to hold their court at Indore, and to govern a part of the elevated pro- vince of Malwa. 217. The king of Oude^ who once ranked as vizier to the Mogul, still governs that fine province lying to the south of the Ganges, and has a splendid 70 Hindostan. palace at Lucknow. The Guickwar in Guzerat, and the Rajah of Travancorey in the most southern part of tlie peninsula, are also dependent upon Britain. 218. The Rajpoot chiefs, who rule over Ajmc^re, an extensive hilly province to the west of Agra, are rather protected by Britain than subject to her. They are a peculiar race, unlike the other Hindoos ; brave, honourable, proud of their descent, and full of respect for the female sex, Tho state of society much resembles that of Europe during the feudal ages. Ajmere, Chittore, Oodipore, contain splendid palaces, and remains of ancient temples. 219. The powers still independent of Britain are the following : — 220. Scindia, the most potent of the Mahratta chiefs, has a long range of territory, extending south-west from Agra, with about four millions of inhabitants. His capital is the strong fortress of Gwalior. Though very hostile to Britain, he is so completely inclosed by her territories, that he can* not attempt any thing against her. 221. Nepal comprises most of the territory on the southern side of the Himalaya mountains, sloping down to the great plain which forms the presidency of Bengal. The country is generally rugged and barren, yet contains extensive woods, and some very fertile valleys. The people are rude and warlike, and the king maintained lately a very obstinate contest with the British power, but was completely vanquished, and obliged to cede a great part of his territories. Catmandoo is the capital. 222. The Seihhs are a confederacy, once religious and now political, who, under their chief, Runjeet 8ing, are at present masters of the fine western pro- vinces of Lahore and Moultan, on the Indus. They have also obtained possession of the beautiful moun- Persia* Tl tatn valley of Cashmere, famous for the fine shawls manufactured there, and of part of the kingdom ot Cabul. Runjeet Sing has disciplined eighty regi- ments in the European manner, and is the most powerful of all the native chiefs. He resides at Lahore. 223. Sinde is a fiat but fertile territory, at the mouth of the Indus, and intersected by the branches of that river. It is ruled by some turbulent chiefs, formerly tributary to Cabul, but who have now shaken off the yoke. Tatta and Hydrabad are the chief towns. 224. British India is ruled by the East India Company, who draw from it a revenue of about 22,000,0()0/. sterling, and maintain an army of 230,000 men, chiefly natives, called spahisy but more commonly sepoys, commanded by European officers. The Company had formerly a commercial monopoly, out the trade has been opened to all British sub- jects. 225. The Laccadive and Maldive islands, west of Hindostan and Ceylon, are unimportant, but very numerous : the Maldives are said to be more than thirteen hundred in number. Ohs, Ceylon, one of the largest and fiit'^t islands in the world, has lately devolved to the English, who have some va- luable settlements on its coast, at Trincomalee, Columbo, &c. Its capital, Candy, was taken by the English in 1815. The island Is rich, and particularly famous for its cinnamon and pearls. PERSIA. 226. Persia is divided into eastern and western* Western Persia is a distinct empire, and contains the provinces of Azerbijan, Mazauderan, Irak-ajemi, Khuzistan, Pars, Kerman, and Khorassan. Theprin- 72 Persia, i i cipal towns and cities are, Teheran the capital, Ispahan, and Shiraz. Oba, Ttie present king of Western Persia resides in great qilendour at Teheran, and the governnient o( the provinces is ably administered by his four sons. 227* Eastern Persia includes Afghanistan, or the country of the Afghans, with the provinces of Se- gestan and Herat, which, united, form the kingdom of Cabul. The country is very mountainous, being traversed by the Indian Caucasus, a continuation of the Himalaya, and not much less lofty. The Af- ghans are a brave people, with some free institutions, and have repeatedly conquered both Persia and In- dia ; but the kingdom is at present much weakened by division among its chiefs. It is now divided among princes residing at the cities of Cabul, Can- dahar, Peshawer, and Herat. 228. Beloochistan, or the country of the Belooches, includes the southern provinces of Mekran, Kohi- Stan, Sarawan, &c. Its capital is Kelat, situate in the latter, on the north-east. 229. Western Persia is a hilly country, with ex- tensive table-lands, but some very fertile plains. Its intercourse with foreign nations is carried on from the Persian Gulf, an arm of the sea, in which are the islands of Ormus pnd Gombroon, once noted for their trade. The chief commercial intercourse is carried on, by caravans, with Turkey on the one hand, and India on the other. 230. From Persia are brought silks, carpets, leather, pearls, and gold and silver lace. Obs, 1. The fruits^ vegetables, and flowers of Persia are delicious. Pearls are found in the Gulf of Dassora. The sheep of this country are deservedly esteenned for their flavour, and for their fleece ; they are remarkable for the size and fatness of their tails, some of which weigh SO lbs. 2. The Persians are celebrated for their vivacity, their gay dresses adorned with jewels^ their humanity and hcspitaKty. Tartar^. 7S They are distinguithed for leariung» and excel pordeularly in poetry. The Peraian is the classio language of the East, and the language of intercourse at eourt, as Frimch is in Europe. The Persians are a handsome people, and the females are at great pains to heighten their beauty by art* 3. This country, whose power and splendour in ancient timet is so amply recorded by sacred and profane writers, and was revived under Abbas the Great, has, by long continued internal dissension and by inroads of barbarous neighbours, been re- duced to the rank of a second-rate kingdom. Latterly it has been encroached on by the Russians, and forced to yield some of its finest provinces* INDEPENDENT TARTARY. 231. This extensive region is celebrated as form- mg the greater part of the ancient Scythia. It was afterwards distinguished as the basis of the wide empire of Timur. It consists of an immense plain, many parts of which are barren, but in others nu-> merous horses and cattle are reared, and their con- quering armies consist chiefly of cavalry. The Tartars, though rude, are extremely hospitable. 232. The chief rivers of Tartary are the Jihon or Oxus, and the Sirr or Sihon ; and the country borders on the great lakes or inland seas of the Caspian and the Aral. 233. The chief divisions of Independent Tartary are, — 1. The territory on the Oxus, or Great Bucha- ria, once the seat of the empire of Timur. Bochara is now the chief city, Samarcand being much de- cayed. 2. Ferghana, on the Sihon, contains many fruitful plains, and the large cities of Koukan, Khojend, and Turkestan. 3. Balk> the ancient Bactria, on the southern side of the mountain range of Indian Caucasus. It is II 74 Jirabia* fertile, and Balk, the capital, was the seat of a great inland trade, but is lately much decayed. 4. Khiva, to the east of the Caspian, is a pastoral plain, surrounded by immense deserts. Urghcnz is the capital. 5. Extensive plains, or steppes, in the north, are tenanted by the four hordes of the Kirgises, a rude pastoral race, addicted to plunder. ARABIA. 234. Arabia is an extensive peninsula, great part of which consists of sandy deserts. On its coasts are some flourishing towns ; but the people of the interior are mostly wanderers and robbers, like their forefathers described in Holy Writ. The climate is, in many parts, hot and dry, and subject to pesti- lential winds. In some districts the soil is fertile, and the air salubrious. In the great deserts, travel- lers guide themselves by the stars and the compass as mariners do at sea. Obs, In the seventh century, the successors of Mahoiret spread their conquests from Arabia over great portions of Asia and Africa. Within the last fiilty years, great changes were produced in the religion of Arabia, by Abdul Wahabj whose numerous followers are called Wahabees; but they have been completely crushed l)y the Fashd of Egypt. 235. Arabia is generally divided into three parts, the Stony, the Desert, and the Happy ; but these divisions are very imperfect, and the following are the principal recognised in the country itself : — 1. Hedjaz ; 2. Yemen ; 3. Ommon ; 4. Nedjed. 236. Hedjaz is a territory in general rude and rocky, though it contains some well-inhabited val- leys. The chief places are Mecca, the birth-place of the prophet Mahomet, and Medina, the place at which bo M as buried. Aradta, 75 Oh$, 1. Medina boasts of a stately mosque, supported on 400 pillars, and furnished with 300 silver lamps, which ore kept continually burning. Mahomet's colli n is covered with cloth of gold, under a canopy of silver tissue. 2. Mecca, situated in a barren valley, is supported chiefly by the annual r(>sort of many thousand pilgrims; its prosperity greatly declined during the power of the Wahabees, who long held possession of it, and deterred pilgrims from resorting thither ; but, since they were driven out by the Fash^ of £gypt» the route to Mecca has again been opened. 237. Between the narrow bmnehes of the north- ern extremity of the lied Sea are Mount Sinai and Mount Horeb, on which are several cells or chapels possessed by monks. Here also is the wil- derness where the children of Israel, on quitting Egypt, wandered forty years before their entrance into Canaan. 238. Yemen, on the south-western coast, merits the appellation of the Happy Arabia. Its hills, rising from the coast, are covered with fine coffee and other aromatic plants. Sana is the capital, but Mocha and Aden are the chief seats of com- merce. 239. Ommon contains a number of sea-ports; among others, the great maritime and commercial state of Muscat. Ras el Khyma, a great strong-hold of pirates, has lately been demolished by the British. , 24-0. Nedjed forms the most interior part of Ara- bia, where the genuine Arab character most distinctly appears. Rude tracts are here intermixed with green pastoral valleys. Nedjed was the chief seat of the power of the Wahabees, and suffered severely in their downfall. Deraie, its capital, was then laid in ruins. 24-1. Arabian horses are much esteemed. Camels and dromedaries are the common beasts of burden. The coffee of Arabia is superior to that of all other H 2 76 Orittntal Archipelago. countries; it and gum are the chief ardcles of export Ob§, The Arabi are eicellent horsemen, eipert at the bow and the lanoe* good marksmen, and a brave people* inured to live in tents, and remove from pUce to place with their flocks and herds. Their dress is a blue shirt, tied about them with a aash or girdle, over which some of them throw a vest of furs. Each encampment is under a scheik, who acts as patriarch of the tribe* \ 1 THE ORIENTAL ARCHIFELAOO. 242. This archipelago consists of a range of large islands, lying to the south of India beyond the Ganges, and of China. Though immediately be- neath the equator, these islands are well watered by numerous streams, descending from high mountains in the interior : hence the plains are generally very fruitful, though rudely cultivated. They produce the finest spices in the world, and abound in rice, sago, and teak timber. The natives are divided into the brown or Malay race, who are imperfectly civilised, and the Papuas, or oriental negroes, who are almost complete savages. The Dutch are nearly entire masters of this archipelago, with the excep- tion of the Philippines, which belong to Spain. The following are the chief island^ and groups of this archipelago : — 1. Java^ the richest and most populous, contains about six millions of people. It has noble forests of teak : sugar, rice, and pepper are raised with suc- cess. Batavia, on its northern coast, is the capital of the Dutch settlements, and the centre of their trade. 2. Sumatra is a larger but less productive island. Its inhabitants, however, are spirited, warlike, and enterprising. Acheen, Siak, and M enangkabao, are the chief native states. The principal Dutch settle- • of bow nured flocks nrith a furs, rch of large d the y be- ed by ntains |y very oduce rice, ed into srfectly !s, who nearly excep- n. }ups of ontains rests of th suc- capital if their island, ke, and mo, are I settle- Oriental A rch ipclayo* — A ustralasia, 77 monts are at Padang and Dcncoolen, the last for- merly British. The most noted productions of Su- matra are camplior and pepper. In its vicinity, the little island of Banca contains inexhaustible mines of tin. 3. Borneo and Celebes^ The former is the largest island in the world, except New Holland, but very uncultivated, and the people almost in a savage state; yet it contains valuable mines of gold and diamonds, the former of which are worked by Chinese settlers. Celebes is a smaller island, but more populous, and several of its tribes display a very active commercial spirit. 4. The 3Ioluccas and Bandasy celebrated under the name of the Spice Islands. These are the na- tive country of the finest of spices, the nutmeg and clove, which have never been cultivated elsewhere with equal success. The Bandas, which produce the nutmeg, are a very small group ; the chief of the Moluccas are Gilolo, Ceram, Ternate, Tidore, and Amboyna, to which last the culture of the clove has been studiously confined by the Dutch, who have exercised, in regard to these articles, a rigid mono- poly, which has much limited their omu trade in them. 5. The Philippines, of which the chief are Lu- conia and Mindanao, form a large and fertile group, which the Spaniards have occupied, but not very actively improved. They carry on, however, a con- siderable trade from Manilla, the capital, which is a large city. AUSTRALASIA. 243. This name is given to a group of great islands, east and south of the Oriental Archipelago,, and H 3 78 Australasia. which, together, approach to the magnitude of a continent The following are the principal : — 1. Australia, or New Holland, which is under the dominion of Great Britain, is about three fourths of the magnitude of all Europe, but has not yet been fully explored : a great poition is marshy and bar- ren ; but other parts, in different directions, are fertile and beautiful, and all under an auspicious climate. The sheep yield remarkably fine wool. The British population exceeds 40,000. On the south-eastern side of Australia is the flourishing colony of Port Jackson, near Botany Bay, containing Sydney, the capital. It was at first es- tablished as a place of banishment for offenders ; but numbers of voluntary emigrants now resort to the country, and obtain grants of land. Other settle* ments have been formed on the eastern coast, and one very lately at Swan River, on the western coast. 2. Van Diemen's Land, separated from New South Wales by Bass's Strait or Channel. It was established on the same plan as Port Jackson, and is equally prosperous, the population exceeding 20,000. Several towns have been laid out, and its capital is Hobart Town, on the. south-eaf>t, upon the river Derwent, advantageously situated for all the pur- poses of commerce. 3. New Zealand consist of two fine islands east of Australia, inhabited by brave but savage tribes, who are at constant war, and devour the flesh of their enemies. Several British crews have been killed and eaten by them. The country yields va- luable spars, and fine flax. 4. Papua, or New Guinea; New Britain, New Ireland, and the Solomon Isles ; New Caledonia and the New Hebrides. These large islands are inhabited by savage tribes of the Oriental Negro race, and as vet little known. Polynesia, 79 POLYNESIA. 244*. This name has been applied to numerouf groups of islands scattered over the wide expanse of the South Sea. Though small, thev are generally fertile and beautiful, and inhabited by mild but licentious and superstitious tribes. The principal are, — 1. The Society Islands, of which the principal is Otaheite or Tahiti ; celebrated for its progress in the arts, and the polished and engasing manners of the inhabitants. They have been lately converted by the missionaries to the Christian religion, and have been induced to relinquish many revolting and superstitious practices to which they were prone. 2. The Friendly Islands, of which the principal is Tongataboo, lie to the west of the Society Islands. They are inhabited by a handsome, intelligent, and courteous race of people. The country is well cul- tivated ; but they have not yet adopted many Eu- ropean improvements. The Fidjee Islands, which adjoin them on the south-west, and the Navigators* Islands on the south-east,* are not so well known, and are inhabited by much more rude and savage tribes, who are even suspected of feeding on human Hcsh. 3. The Marquesas, named sometimes, from their discoverer, the Islands of Mendana, He north from Otaheitee. The natives are extremely handsome in their persons, though they disfigure them strangely by puncturing and tattooing. In their clothes, houses, and canoes they are inferior to the Ota- heiteans, and have borrowed nothing from Europe. 4. The Sandwich Islands lie considerably north of the groups now described. They afe very moun- tainous, Mount Roa being above 16,000 feet high| 60 Poi^esia, Rnd there Is a large and very forniidable volcano. The plains, however, are fertile. The people are Anely formed, vigorous, and active ; and though, in a fatal conflict with them. Captain Cook lost his life, their general conduct towards the British has been honourable and friendly. Obi, Tainahainm tlicir lato king, did much to Improve his ■ul>ji*ctf by the adoption of European arts ; and his successor visited Kngland, where he unfortunately died, 'llie people have lK>en converted to Christianity ; they have also Improved In industry, and have opened n considerable trade with the United States. Owhyhee, Woahoo» and Atooi, are the prhi- cipal islands. In Woahoo is Ilonororu, the chief sea-port. 5. TJie Caroline Islands form a numerous {;Toup in the western part of the Pacific. Hogole, Oualan, and Yap are considerable : the people appear some- what civilised, and skilled in navigation ; but tliey are little known. The chains of Mulgrave, Wallis, and Hadauk, to the eastward, appear only branches of the Carolines. The same may, perhaps, be said of the Pelew Islands, famous for the hospitable re* ^eption given there to Captain Wilson's shipwreckcc crew, and for the visit of their prince, Lee Boo, to England, where he died. 6. The Ladrone or Marianne Islafids^ to tbe north of the Carolines, arc beautiful and fertile, but almost deserted, the native inhabitants having disap- peared, while the Spaniards have formed only a small establishment there* Guam and Tinian are the principal islands. Ob», Tlie Pacific contains long chains of small coral islands of very curious formation. They consist of the well known tegefnile substance called coral, peopled by numerous insects, which ramifies and becomes encrusted with their shells, until Vt reaches the sur&ce, and forms low flat reefs or islands. The chief are Gambler's Group, Serle and Bow islands. Remark- able detached islands are, Easter Island, noted for the intelli- gence of the natives, and for certain colossal statues early found • J • • ,1 i a ! arm rorcertBin coiosBOi statues eany tot Asta* — America. •I on M I •iiif Pltcalrn'i Idand, yMoplod by • body of Britbh •rumen wbo had muUnit d on b( mrd tht Bounty. Fartbtr iMi wtf tnav notice a recently ditcuvercd group, almott covered witli leo and tnuw, named New Stiuth Slietland. it SUMMARY OF ASIA. Nfttloni. Turki'jr^ , I ml. Tartary... Chtn. Tartary Pemia B«io. PopulaUon. »uo,ouo 4,800,000 mjooo 2,400,000 AdU,000 t9«,000 1.970.000 194,000 100,000 350.000 i,a(N),o()o 90,000 1,000,000 18/)(jO,(J00 7,000,000 8,000,000 10,000.000 lO,O0O,(J00 14,000,000 140.(N)0,000 5,000.000 S,000,000 8,000.(M)0 '200.000,01 K) SO.000,000 8,000,000 18,000,000 1,000,000 Religion. Mahometan. I Or. Church. Mah. * Pag. ahometan . Buddhism Mahometan Mah. A Brahm. Brahmin.. .M..H... Buddhism Buddhism Buddhism Deism ik Buddh. Deism 8i Buddh. Mahometan. variOUS...M. ....... Various..... Ooecrn. roent. Pesob Desp. Mon. Detpb Van. Varl. Despk Absol. Desp. Desp. Patriar. Mon. Vari. AMERICA. 245. America is a great continent, called often the New World, and comprising nearly alt the land in the western hemisphere. It is divided into two great portions, North and South, which are con- nected by the narrow Isthmus of Darien. Oba. America extends from 74° north to 569 south. It if about 9000 miles in length, and its greatest breadth is 4CXX) miles. Taking |ts mean breadth at 2000 or 2200 miles, it covers about 15,000,000 or 17,000.000 square miles. 24'6. North \merica contains the United States, Mexico, Guatimala, British America, and vast tracts occupied b> the independent Indian tribes. Li'iiJcn^ hibluhfJ ^¥ L<<>ynian Ji- l^ httif _i^- «<> '■''•. ...>' \ «• ,» Vfl \i} ..-'^- tf<' Si"' W c^' i.i'" ^'f*-iahmB- jtoifl*** S /'uniii^ JA'.Staititiiiltfy M * ..^---h Vt < "V --V- i-V-' UliW^"" J r»*ur'' "■%i T",*',; iXDIfO' ■M V I^v-^ (.11.* ^(t' *»*«^ ^/.^/l.l ''V/.I,/,. fiifViAi'ii jtcoV** tOuz. ^: ;<«««'*-' 1>< •fini ./ '/ .1^' Iti dC"'' C^* ^.^ Spi.^i**''' K.^ t O •iiiltnii hihliihrJ hy lotutnuin dr ( T /{i(«m.>.vf<»' ft'iv. Etumiinl hv S.Batl^my Str*BloontA-! 82 America, Obi. The Russians have lately claimed a large territory in the north-west. 247. South America has been colonised chiefly by tlie Spanish and Portuguese. It contains Colombia, Peru, Chile, and La Plata (including Paraguay), Brazil, Guiana, Amazonia, and Patagonia. Obs, The vast continent of America was unknown to the inhabitants of the Old World till October 1492, when it was discovered by Christoval Colon (latinised Columbus), in an attempt which he made to sail in that direction to the East Indies. The first land he descried was Guanahani, or Cat Island, one of the Bahamas. In subsequent voyages he ex- plored the islands since called the West Indies, and visited the mainland of South America. Other voyagers discovered other regions, the most valuable of which have been colonised by Europeans, who have driven out or subdued the original in- habitants. America is so named from Amerigo Vespucci, a Florentine, one of the early discoverers. GENERAL FEATURES OF NORTH AMERICA. 248. The inland seas of North America are, the gnlfs of Mexico, California, and St. Lawrence, with Hudson's Bay and Straits^ Baffin's Bay, and Davis's Straits. 249. The lakes Superior, Huron, Erie, Ontario. Michigan, Winipeg, Athabasca, and the Slave Lake, are among the largest in the world, and may justly be called inland seas. Obi, Lake Superior is more than 400 miles long, and ha.s many large islands. The passage between the lakes Ontario and Erie is interrupted by a stupendous cataract, called the Falls of Niagara, 150 feet in height, in the form of a half mo«n. The noise of this fall is heard at the distance of 30 or 40 miles. 250. The rivers are also magnificent features in Nchrth America. The principal are the Missouri, the Mississippi, the St. Lawrence, the Ohio, the Hudson, the Chesapeake, the Delaware, and the Columbia. Amertccu 85 Obi, The Mi!9souri and the Mississippi form one river above SOOO miles long, with the Ohio and other large branches, which irrigate a plain of 2,000,000 square miles of fertile land almost unoccupied. 251. The gulf of St. Lawrence is formed, on the east, by the island of Newfoundland. On the south- east of the latter is a great sand-bank, 500 miles in length, celebrated for the cod-fishery. 252. The mountains are, the Rocky or Stony, among which the Missouri and Columbia take their rise ; and the Alleghany, which contains the source of the Ohio. On the north-west coast are several volcanic mountains; but North America is, for the most part, a fiat and fertile country. THE UNITED STATES OF NORTH AMERICA. 253. The United States of America are distin- guished for the vast extent of their territory, their rapid improvement, and their free constitution. The greater part of the inhabitants sprung from English settlers, though there t-re many descendants of Germans, Dutch, and Swiss. Including black slaves, they amount to above 13,000,000. 254'. These states are in a very flourishing and improving condition, and promise to become, on the abolition of slavery, which they now tolerate, one of the most powerful and happy communities in the world. They export vast quantities of cotton, tim- ber, tobacco, grain, rice, pitch, potash, and skins ; their ships are to be found in every part of the world. 255. The Republic of the United States is go- verned by a President, chosen every four years, and is divided into the Northern, Middle, and Southern States, twenty-four in number, with four smaller divisions called Territories. 84 America, 256. The Northern States are, Maine, capital Portland; Vermont, Montpellier ; New Hampshire, Concord ; Massachusetts, Boston ; Connecticut, Hartford and Newhaven ; Rhode Island, Neivpori and Providence, 257. The Middle States are. New York, chief city New York ; New Jersey, Trenton ; Pensyl- vania, Philadelphia ; Delaware, Dover ; Ohio, CVn- cinnati ; Michigan, (Territory) Detroit; Indiana, Indianopolis ; Illinois, Vandalia; and Missouri, St, Louis, 258. The Southern States are, Maryland, Baltic more ; Virginia, Richmond ; Kentucky, Lovisville ; North Carolina, Charleston; South Carolina, (7o- lumhia; Georgia, Savannah ; Tennessee, Nashville; Alabama, Mobile ; Mississippi, Natchez ; Arkansas, (Territory) Little Rock ; Louisiana, New Orleans ; Florida, (Territory) St,Augustin; and Missouri, (Territory) New London, 259. New York is the largest city in the United States, and in all America, having more than 200,000 inhabitants. Its commerce is supposed to exceed that of any city in the world, except London. The other chief cities and towns are, Washington the capital, Philadelphia, Boston, Baltimo^'e, Charles- ton, and New Orleans. 260. The rivers of the United States are large and numerous. The Mississippi, Missouri, Chesapeake, Delaware, Hudson, and Ohio, are the most consi- derable. These rivers are united by magnificent canals, the principal of which is 360 miles long, uniting the Hudson river with Lake Erie. Ohi, 1. The city of Washington, in the territory of Co- lumbia, was established as the seat of government, after the year 1800. It stands af the junction of the rivers Fotomak and the Eastern Branch, extending nearly four miles up each* and iaduding a tract of territory not exceeded, in point €# America, 85 convenience, salubrity, and beauty, by any in America. It it not, however, a large city. 2. Towns are springing up in every part of the Union, and 103 arc already enumerated containing from 5000 to 12,000 inhabitants. THE LATE SPANISH DOMINIONS IN NORTH AMERICA. 261. The isthmus that joins North and South America consists of the Republic of Mexico and 'Guatimala; but Mexico includes Old and New California. The chief towns are, Mexico, Puebla, Acapulco, and Vera Cruz. Mexico, the oldest city in America of which we have any account, is spa- cious and magnificent. The present constitution of Mexico resembles that of the United States of North America, being a federative republic. 262. Mexico consists chiefly of a high table-land, from which rise Orizaba and other lofty volcanic peaks. It is fitted to produce the grain and fruits of the tomperate climates. The maritime districts, indeed, are rich in tropical products, but unhealthy. Its chief value consists in the silver mines, which, at the beginning of the present century yielded an- nually nearly 5,000,000/. sterling ; but they were greatly injured during the revolution, and, notwith- standing the application of a large British capital, have not been fully restored. 263. Guatimala is a small state to the north of the Isthmus of Darien, which has separated from Mexico, and assumed the title of Central America. It contains the large lake of Nicaragua, and the territory of Honduras, from which the British pro- cure mahogany. • ' Obs. This republic exports indigo, barilla, and the finest C0009* At different elevations, this and all the adjacent states aiibrd every climate and species of production. In a few hours tlie traveller may pass from regions of eternal snow, through 86 America, European cultivation, to plaiiii covered with lugar-oanes and cofTee-trcei. THE BRITISH POSSESSIONS IN NORTH AMERICA. 264. The British colonies are very extensive, though in many part8 barren and thinly inhabited. They include Labrador, Lower and Upper ("anada, with half of the great lakes Ontario, Eric, Huron, and Superior; also Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, tiie isle of Cape Breton, Newfoundland, the Bermu- das, and other islands. 265. Lower Canada is a level and fertile country, though in a cold climate, and is situated mostly to the north of the river St Lawrence. The inliabitahts are chiefly descendants of early French settlers, still professing the Catholic religion. The population ex- ceeds half a million. The chief towns are Quebec and Montreal, from the last of which there is a great fur trade. Upper Canada, lying to the north of the great lakes of Ontario, Erie, Huron, and Superior, is still more fertile, though hitherto very thinly in- habited ; but numerous emigrants now proceed from this country as agricultural settlers, so that it already contains above 200,000 inhabitants, and is yearly increasing. A great quantity of lumber is sent to the West Indies, and timber and grain to England ; to facilitate the transport of which several canals have been cut at great cost. 266. Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, with the adja- cent islands of Cape Breton and Prince Edward, lying in the Gulf of St Lawrence, are covered with noble forests, and well situated for fishery; but -their climate is foggy and cold, and their lands less fertile, though still such as to invite many emigrants Halifax, in Nova Scotia, Frederictown, and St John's, in New Brunswick, are the chief towns. America, 87 267. Newfoundland is rocky and barren ; but it is tho scat of the greatest cod-fishery in tlie world ; whicli is curried on from the shore by British sub- jects, and in the open sea by the French and Ame- ricans, who are allowed to dry Mid cure the fish on unoccupied parts of the coast. St. John's, the capital, is a great fishing station. OF THE NATIVE TRIBES OF NORTH AMERICA. 268. Numerous small tribes, or hordes, of from 500 to 5000 each, occupy the vast extent of country from the United States to the Pacific Ocean ; also Greenland, Labrador, the regions around Hudson's Bay, and along the western coast, all in a barbarous condition, and depending on the uncertain produce of the chace. The British companies at Montreal and Hudson's Bay despatch traders in all directions to collect the valuable furs with which these regions abound. 269. The northern coast of America, only recently discovered, has been found to border on the vast expanse of the Arctic Ocean. It is inhabited by the Esquimaux, a race QUite different from the Indians, and comparatively laborious, peaceable, and intelligent. They subsist by fishing, and chasing the wild and amphibious animals which abound on this coast. Russia claims the more westerly part of the territory, where, as well as on the Aleutian Islands, between America and Asia, she has some small settlements, with a view to the fur trade. At the: northern extremity of America, Captain Ross dis- covered a large peninsula called Boothia, partly inhabited. In the ocean beyond, Captain Parry discovered a range of large islands, of which the principal have been called Melville, Bathurst, and Cockburn. They are uninhabited, the climate being I 2 88 Ameridf, extremely severe, and in winter only a few of the most hardy animal tribes are able to subsist THE WEST INDIES. 270. The West Indies consist of a group of large and fertile islands which lie between the continents of North and South America. 271* The largest of these islands, Cuba (whose chief town is the Havanna), a flourishing sea-port, and Porto Rico, still belong to Spain, and have of late advanced greatly in culture and population. 272. Hayti, formerly called St. Domingo, or His- paniola, is one of the richest and finest of these islands, and next in size to Cuba. Before the French revolution, the western part belonged to France, and the eastern to the Spaniards ; but the negro slaves in the French part rebelled in 1791, and, after long and sanguinary contests, the whole island was united into one negro republic, of which the actual President is named Boyer ; and its inde- pendence has been acknowledged by France. 273. Jamaica is a large island belonging to the English, and in a high state of cultivation. The sugar, rum, and coffee, annually exported from it and the other British islands, are worth more than 8,000,000/. sterling. Obs, 1. The Bahamas, north from Hayti and Cuba, belong also to the English, and are numerous, but small and unpro- ductive. 2. The Caribbees extend from north to south, east of tlie others : they are called also the Windward Island?, or the An- tilles. 274. Of these, since the treaty of Paris, 1814 the English Islands are, Barbadoes, Tobago, Trinidad^ Grenada, the Grenadines, St. Vincent, St. Lucia^ Dominica, Montserrat, Antigua, Barbuda, St Chris^ irib America, 8d w of the of large 'iitinents (whose lea-port, have of ion. or His- )f these ore the nged to but the n 1791, e whole r which ts inde- to the I. The from it re than I) belong 1 iinpro- }t of the the An- 14 the 'inidadj Lucia^ > Chris* A' *.. ii wi y i iPBi ,!■» mi ll 1,1 i i ,| |H • II I f | ,| MmmmmtmmimmmiimmLi Apnerica, 89 lopher, an(l Ncvin, Anguilla, Virgingorda, and Tor- tola, with Hovoral Hinaller islos. ^275, Till! French islands are, Martinico, Guada« loupe, Maricgalante, and part of St. Martin's. The Danish are, St. Cruz, St Thomas, and St. John's ; the Dutch, Su Eustatius, Saba, and part of St. Martin's. To the latter, also, belongs the Leeward island Curacjao, off the coast of Venezuela. The island of St. Bartholomew belongs to Sweden. 276. The native Caribs having been inhumanly destroyed by the sword and musket, these islands are now inhabited by about one eighth Europeans, one sixth Creoles, and the rest negro slaves, for w hose speedy emancipation, however, arrangements have now been made by the Brit!£»h government* They supply Europe almost entirely with sugar, rum, and coffee, and furnish also some cotton, cocoa, and spices. * SOUTH AMERICA. 2T7< South America composes a vast peninsula, comprising nearly half the continent. It is distin- guished by the grandeur of its natural features. The great chain of the Andes, in its loftiest height, extends from north to south, near the western coast ; and the chief river, the Amazon, surpasses in the length of its course any other in the known world. The Rio de la Plata and the Orinoco are also of very great magnitude. The mountains are higher than any other except the Indian chain of Himalaya. Chimborazo, 21,000 feet high, was long supposed the loftiest in the world ; but the peaks of Sorata and Illimani, in Upper Peru, are now found to be still more elevated. Cotopaxi is the most tremen- dous volcano known, often throwing out streams of H'arm water, with dead fishes ; and its explosions, 13 I.IIIIKitlll Li>iultin,ntHulud by Li>niinun A- (T tiittrtuLttrr A'lr. I * *«jM- H«»nj 90 AtncriccL* I. I according to Humboldt, are heard at the dintance of more than 100 miles. The plains are most extensive and generally very fruitful, and the mines are un- rivalled in their abundance of the precious metals. 278. The finest parts of this region, after their first discovery, were conquered by Spain, whose jealous and despotic policy checked that improvement which might have resulted from their vast natural ad- vantages. Within the last twenty years, however this yoke has been completely shaken off, and Spain does not now possess an inch of ground on the American continent. It has been formed into inde- pendent republican states, of which the principal are, Colombia, Peru (Lower and Upper), Chile and La Plata. Brazil, conquered by the Portuguese, has also become a separate state, with a free con- stitution. A portion of Guiana, and the most inte- rior and southern parts of the continent, are still chiefly in the possession of native tribes. 279. Colombia is the most important of the new republics, and that which earliest shook off the Spanish yoke. Tlie eastern part consists of a range of very lofty mountains (including Chimborazo and Cotopaxi), with the declivities and deep valleys be- tween them ; while the western is composed oi immense and level plains. The region is generally fertile, fit for every tropical product, and distin- guished for its excellent cocoa. Gold is abundant m the eastern district of Choco. Obs. Colombia has been much agitated by internal dis- sension, and has lately been split into three distinct parts, "- New Granada, Venezuela, and the £quad6r ; united, however, by a federal compact. It contains a number of considerable cities, among which are, Caraccas, CumanA, and Carthagena, on the north coast ; Panamii and Porto Bello on the opposite sides of the Isthmus of Darien ; Santa F^ de Bogoti, Quito, and Popayan, in the interior ; and Guayaquil, on the South Sen. The population is about 2. 800^000, including negroes America. 91 and Indiansi, who have been liberally invested with all the rights of citizenship. 280. PerUi Upper and Lower, is celebrated as the Beat of the mild and civilised empire of the Incas. Being composed of the mountainous region of the Andes, with a narrow plain between them and the Pacific, where rain never falls, its soil is not very productive. It is distinguished, however, by mines of silver and mercury, which were the richest in the world, but have greatly declined in value. The chief silver mines are at Pasco in Lower, and Potosi in Upper Peru ; those of mercury, at Guancavelica. Upper Peru has been lately called Bolivia, from Bolivar, the Columbian president, who effected its liberation. Its mountain peaks of Sorata and lUi- mani are the loftiest in the New World. Peru may contain about two millions and a half of people, liima, its capital, is the most splendid city in South America, and carries on a great trade by its port of Callao. Cusco is the ancient capital of the Incas. 28 L Chile, to the south of Peru, consists of a long, narrow, but very fertile plain, between the Andes and the ocean. It contains mines of gold, and still more valuable ones of copper. Industry and cultivation are yet imperfect, but in a progres- sive state. Santiago is the capital; but the chief trade is from the ports of Valparaiso, Conception, and Valdivia. 282. La Plata consists of an immense plain, watered by the river of that name, and reaching nearly across the continent, from the Atlantic to the Andes. Great part of the surface consists of wide plains, called pampas, covered with luxuriant herb- age, and on which vast herds of wild cattle have multiplied, whose hides form the chief object of trade. The territory is formed into a sort of fede- ral republic, the constitution of which is not yet 92 America, fulljT settled. Buenos Ayres, the capita)> is at the mouth of the La Plata, and the chief interior towns are Cordova and Mendoza. Obt» Paraguajt on the upper part of the river, with itt eapital, Assumption, is despotically ruled by an individual named Dr. Francia. This dUstrict produces the matit or herb of Paraguay, used as tea throughout all these countries. Monte Video, with its territory so^ith of the La Plata, forms now a separate republic. 283. Brazil occupies nearly the whole eastern coast between the La Plata and the Amazons, to an indefinite distance into the interior. It is a vast and fruitful plain, diversified by mountain ranges of moderate elevation, which, in this climate, do not obstruct culture : that of sugar and cotton has of late been greatly extended ; too much, indeed, by means of the importation of negro staves. Some part« of Brazil are also very rich in diamonds, and in gold. The country was long despotically ruled by Portugal, out is now separated from that kingdom, governed by a prince of the house of Braganza, but on a very free and constitutional basis. The popu- lation is nearly five millions. Rio de Janeiro, the capital, is a large city, beautifully situated, and the seat of a great trade. Bahia, or San Salvador, and Pemambuco, are also flourishing sea-ports. Oha, Brazil alone is a continuous country equal in size to all Europe, being 2000 miles long, and 1000 miles wide. 284. The coast of Guiana is divided among dif- ferent European nations. The English have the flourishing colonies of Demerara and Berbice, rich in sugar and cotton ; the Dutch have Surinam, also prosperous ; and the French have Ca3'enne^ famous for its pepper. The interior, watered by the Ori- noco, is claimed by the Portuguese ; but is chiefly in the possession of savage native tribes. The same may be said of the extensive tracts, in tlie centre America. 93 of the continent, called Amazonia, though claimed by the Portuguese as part of Brazil. Patagonia, in the southern extremity, is inhabited by a tall and vigorous race, who have been falsely represented as giants ; but the island of Terra del Fuego, on which Cape Horn is situated, is occupied by a meagre and stunted race. 285. The islands adjacent to South America, ex- clusive of the West Indies, are the Malouinas, or Falkland Islands, Terra del Fuego, Juan Fernandez, the Galapagos, and the Pearl Islands, near Pa- nama. SUMMARY OF AMERICA. Countries. Worth America, United States... British Do- ? minions,&c. \ Mexico.... Guatimala ♦?»it. I. es. :::) The Antilles South America* Colombia Peru Chile and La PlaU Braiil. Guiana, 2,407,000 3,000,000 800,000 Population. Religion. Govern- ment. 13,000,000 Protest. r Cath. 1,200,000 r 6,800,1 1.1,500,1 000 ,000 2,500,000 900,000 «50,000 2,843,000 { 2,800,000 2,500,000 2,260,000 5,000,000 500,000 •I and I t Prot. J Catholic. Catholic. {Cath. 1 and I Prot. J Catholic. Catholic* Catholic. Catholic. r Cath. 1 < and I LProt. J Republic. Monarchy. Republic. Republic European Governors. Republic. Republic. Republic. r Limited \ Mon. European Governors. 94 Afiteriea. — Afi ica* Gb9. In th« statements of population in the preocding turn- matj are included the native tribes, the n^ro alavea, and the mixed races called mulattoes, people of colour, &c., who, ac- cording to Baron Von Humboldt, amount to above 2 1 ,500,000, of whom 8,610,000 are Indians, 6,433,000 negroes, and 6,4^StOOO mixed races. Of these, 7,500,000 Indians, and nearly 5,500,000 of the mixed races, belong to the former l^anish dominions in North and South America. On ac- count of the mixture of races in the Antilles, we subjoin the following table of population from the same dis anguished author : — Whites. British Antilles Spanish Antilles French Antilles Dutch, Danish 1 and Swedish I Antilles J Hayti Free People of Colour, both Ne- groes and Mulattoes. Negro Slaves, and some Mu- latto ditto. Total Po- pulation. 71,350 342,100 23,000 16,150 30,000 L 78,350 319,500 18,000 7,050 790,000 626,800 281,400 178,000 61,300 776,500 943,000 219,000 84,500 820,000 AFRICA. 286. Africa, to the south of Europe, forms a very large peninsula, joined to Asia by the isthmus of Suez, its northern states were anciently very celebrated; Egypt and Ethiopia were considered the cradle of civilization, and Carthage, founded by a Phoenician colony, was the greatest of the com- mercial states. They were even distinguished during tha Saracen dynasty, but, under the bigoted and le Mahometan Stales in the north ; the nations on ■H 90 ao / w 1 • / i pZil^ 1Vu|Mr d|- ('■n.-.v 1 ** .i. „^,,JrB.,W .sfi\tpH,t ^ r. r ^^ttit^^HUHl A ( rt V»Sl jMt^ ■=* IS*'^'^ ,M ■HI Aki/ , h) N> .liuiiir -Jfl We8t 2y> g/lii, 1'iil'li.rliiil />»■ l.i'iiifiiiiiii .<• <'.' /'iilinim <.,a|M> i>f ( nHitl Biape' — — p^u iI'ImIiiiI /•»• Loiiifiniiit .<• /"'.' lUliiiiiKvii'r /I'l Hii.mn,-,! hv Xll.ill Hun Sir! hl.'.'iii.'b-' , mercial stales: '1 hey Wei*^ ^Wft mSHBgUiSHiea tranng^* th^ Saracen dynasty, but, under tlie bigoted and Africa. 95 despotic yoke of the Turks, have sunk into barbar- bm and insignificance. ' 287. In Africa, the principal rivers are, the Nile, the Niger, the Gambia, the Congo or Zahir, called also Zatre, and the Senegal. The Niger, whose termination was long so mysterious, has been ascer- tained to fall, by numerous estuaries, into the Gulf of Benin. Lake Tchad, wh'nh bounds Bornou on the east, was first made known by Messrs. Denham and Clapperton ; it is a magnificent piece of water, 200 miles long, and about 150 broad, and receives the Shary, a large river, from the south. 288. In consequence of the periodical rains, the rivers of Africa overflow their banks annually from June to Septembe:*, by which means they fertilise khe country, and leave behind them, in canals pre- pared for the purpose, a sufRcient quantity of water for the rest of the year. 289. The Atlas Mountains south of Barbary have &een long celebrated ; and the Mountains of the Moon are a lofty range, south of Darfur and Cen- tral Africa. 290. Northern Africa is distinguished by immense deserts, extending over one third of the continent. Of these the sandy desert of Sahara is 1500 miles long, by 800 broad. ObB. These deserts are like seas, the sands being moved by the winds like waters, and storms on them being more destruc- tive to travellers than the sea to voyagers. Tliey have Oatea, or fertile spots, like islands, whose inhabitants are separated from the rest of the world ; and caravans and merchants are enabled by these to traverse immense tracts. The kingdom of Fezzan is an oasis which separates the Libyan from tlie great Desert, and connects Tripoli with Bornou and Houssa. 291. Africa may be considered in the following order : Egypt ; Nubia ; Abyssinia ; Central Africa ; the Mahometan States in the north ; the nations on 96 AJhea* i the western coast ; the colony of the Cape of Good Hope in the south ; and the eastern kingdoms op* posite Madagascar. 292. Egypt consists of a narrow valley along the Nil'^) bounded on each side by ridges of rocky hills It is divided into Upper* Middle, and Lower, which last is formed into a dilta, by the lower branches of the Nile, and is exceedingly fertile. If not the parent, Egypt was, in early times, the nurse of arts and letters. Its temples, pyramids, and tombs, the monuments of its ancient grandeur, are of stu- pendous magnitude, surpassing those of any other country. Many of the walls are entirely covered with sculptures, paintings, and hieroglyphics. Obs, The sculptured statues are so large, that figures thirty, forty, or sixty feet high are not uncommon, and many busts weigh many tons. The paintings represent all the arts and employments. The hieroglyphics record the history and cir- cumstances, but till lately they were unintelligible, and the study of them has thrown much new light on ancient history. 293. The pyramids near Cairo are always ranked as wonders of the world. They were tombs of cer- tain kings or Pharaohs, built about 2500 b. c. Obi* The largest is 593 feet high, and covers 1 1 acres at iti base. The second is 428. 294. Egypt sunk into great degradation beneath Turkish dominion ; but it Ia reviving under Moham- med Ali, its present ruler. He has made extra- ordinary efforts to restore agriculture and manu- factures, has rc-opcncd the ancient canals, and studiously introduced the arts and civilisation of Europe. He has completely shaken off the yoke of the Porte, and has even conquered Nubia, Pa- lestine, Syria, and great part of Arabia ; so that he is now at the head of a considerable empire. 295. Grand Cairo, the capital, is a large and splendid city. The ports are, Alexandria, Rosetta* Africa* 97 and Damietta : but the principal ruins are at The- bes and Dendera, in Upper K^'ypt. 296. NuDiA is a long narrow range of territory ex- tending upwards along tlie Nile, whose waters fertilise two or three miles on each side, beyond which are extensive deserts. Many of the rocks which rise on the banks are sculptured into spacious temples and pyramidsi of which the chief are at Ibsambul and M era we. The people are rude, lawless, and cor- rupted by the prevalence of the slave trade. Nubia is divided into a variety of states, of which the chief are Dongola, Merawe, Shendi, and Sennaar. The Pash^ of Kgypt lately conquered all these countries, but holds them by a somewhat precarious tenure. To the south-east of Nubia are Kordofan and Dar- fur, rude countries, inhabited by a barbarous people. South of Darfur is Donga, a mountainous territory, from which the Nile is said to take its rise. 297. Abyssinia is an extensive country to the south-east of Nubia. It is traversed by high moun- tains, between which are many fertile valleys. The Abyssinians are a barbarous people, delighting in bloodshed, feeding on raw flesh, and sometimes cut- ting slices from the living animal. Great part of the country has been overrun by the Galla, a still more savage race, who ride on oxen, and adorn themselves with the entrails of those animals. They are masters of Gondar, the capital, and of the finest central pro- vinces ; but there is still a native government in the northern province of Tigre, and another in the southern districts of Shoa and Efat. 298. Central Africa consists of an extensive region, separated from the countries on the coast by vast forests and deserts, but comprising now the most improved and cultivated tracts of that great conti- nent. The continued range of the mountains of the Mooni under various names and aspects, crosses it K 98 Africa. • I fVom wett to cast, and gives rise to the Niger, with its tributaries, and to other great rivers whieh unite in forming the lalce Tchad. The iilains are thus well watered, and extremely fruitlul, yielding in abundance grain, indigo, and cotton, which is skil- fully woven into fine cloth. The inhabitants con- sist partly of negro nations, who are more industri- ous and intcjligcnt than in other parts of Africa ; partly of Moors and Felatas, whose ancestors mi. grated from Kgypt and Barbary. 299. This region is divided among many nations, which cannot be here fully described ; but the fol- lowing are the principal : — 300. 1. Bornou is an extensive plain, immediately west of the lake Tchad, and watered by the river Yeou. It is fertile, but imperfectly cultivated, and the inhabitan^is are uncivilised. They are almost at constant war with the people of Begnerm6, a large country to the north-east of the lake. Loggun, on the river Shary, which falls into the Tchad, is a wealthy and industrious country. Mandara is a fine plain at the foot of a vast range of mountains. These nations are negro, yet have been converted to the Mahometan religion, which they profess with bigoted zeal. 301. 2. Jloussa is a fine and extensive region to tlie west of Bornou. The Fellatas, who inhabit it, are an industrious and intelligent, as well as warlike race ; and the country, being well cultivated, yields in abundance wheat, fruits, vegetables, cotton, and indigo. The sultan of Soccatoo holds at present supreme sway over the states composing Houssa, which were conquered by his predecessor. They are chiefly Kashna, Kano, Zegzeg, Goober, and Zamfra. Soccatoo, and Zaria, the capital of Zeg- zeg, are the largest cities ; but Kano is the chief •eat of the caravan trade. Numerous slaves, Afi'iea* 90 l)rought from the mountainouB country iti the Boutli, QHi horn sold to tho IJarbary niercliantt)* Aduinoua and Jacoba mv situated beyond tlio inoun* tains, on the great river S)iary» but are little known. ii()2. The countries on the lower Niger, recently explored by Lander, who died on the 1^7th of January, 1834, in conHequencc of a musket ball he received in his hip from some barbarous natives, being well watered, and in many places inundated by that river, are extremely fruitful ; but, in ap- proaching the sea, they become marshy and unheal- thy. The Niger here rolls a magniticent stream several miles broad, and resembling an inland sea ; and it receives the Tshadda, almost as large as itself, flowing from countries unknown. The people in this region are generally negro and pagan ; but they have made a greater progress in the arts than the nations on the coast. Youri, with a large and strong capital of the same name, is very populous, yielding large harvests of rice. The people are bra>'o, but tlie king has incurred just reproach by the attack which terminated in the death of Park, and by the extortion practised towards Lander. Boussa, Kiama, Wawa, and Niki are also consider- a1)le states. Yarriba, having Eyeo for its capital, is a very large and populous kingdom ; Nyffe, on the opposite, or eastern side of the Niger, is distin- guished for maimfacturing industry, its cloths and mats being superior to any other made in Africa. The chief towns are Rabba and Koolfu. Zagoshi, on an island in the Niger, is possessed of numerous barks, with which it carries on an extensive trade. Funda is a great city on the Tshadda : Kirree and Eboe, on the Delta of the Niger, though surrounded by forests and swamps, are enriched by their trade with the coast. 303. The countries on the uppet* Niger are also K 2 100 Ajirtcek I) f i rich and industrious. Timbuctoo has been long celebrated as the seat of the caravan trade with Morocco for slaves and gold. Banibarra is a fine plain watered by the Niger ; and Sego, its capital, is large and flourishing. Jenne, Sansanding, and Walet, are also great seats of inland trade. Almost all the streams which flow from the mountains in the south of this country contain gold, which is ex- tracted by agitation of the cascalho or gravel in water. 0&». The internal trade of Africa is carried on by caravans, or parties of some hundred dealers, who convey their mer- chandise on droves of camels, and stop at certain protected places, where they establish fairs and make sales and exchanges. Caravans which leave Egypt or Barbary, have to pass over extensive deserts, where many perish. 304<. Barbary extends along the Mediterranean, from the Atlantic to Egypt, and includes the Ma- hometan States of Tripoli, Tunis, Algiers, and the empire of Morocco. It forms a beautiful and fertile region, once flourishing, but long sunk under tyrrany and oppression. The most atrocious piracies were carried on from the sea-ports ; but these have been suppressed by Britain ; and the French have now taken possession of Algiers, the chief seat of these outrages, and are endeavouring to colonise the territory. 305. On the western coast of Africa are innu- merable tribes of people, and various kingdoms, wa- tered by the rivers Senegal and Gambia, on which are many European forts and settlements ; but the climate is unfortunately extremely unhealthy and fatal to Europeans. The French settlements are ou the Senegal, with a view to the gum trade. 306. Sierra Leone, which includes Freetown, is an English settlement in Guinea, formed for the ci- vilisation of the interior of Africa. Africa, 101 05a. This settlement was expected to produce the happiest effects among the natives, and in due time to afford powerful means for eifecting the civilisation of Africa, and destroying the slave trade ; but the extreme unheaithiness of the climate has much impeded its success. On the adjoining coast, the Americans have founded the colony of Liberia on a smaller scale, but with favourable prospects. 307. Guinea is divided into the Grain^ the Ivory* and the Gold coasts ; it formerly supplied Europeans with slaves. Behind the Gold coast are the exten- sive kingdoms of Ashantee and Dahomey, which have made some progress in the arts ; but they carry on war with dreadful ferocity, and celebrate the death of their kings with thousands of human vic- tims. Gold and ivory are the chief exports from this coast. 308. Benin, Waree, Brass, Bonny, and Calabar are situated on a succession of great estuaries, which form the mouths of the Niger. The country is a dismal swamj , covered with forests ; but great quan- tities of palm oil and many slaves are brought down from the interior. The great river Zaire, with the countries of Loango, Congo, Angola, and Benguela, present the most interesting objects on the more southern coast, and are all peopled with ill-civilised negi'oes. They contain the Portuguese settlements of Loando and Benguela, whence numerous slaves are conveyed to Brazil. 309. Southern Africa contains the colony of the Cape of Good Hope, first founded by the Dutch, but now ceded to E-^land. Cape Town contains 20,000 inhabitants, and has newspapers and a scientific journal. The country is chiefly occupied by Dutch settlers ; for a British agricultural colony, which was attempted some time ago, did not succeed. To the north are the pastoral tribe of the Boshuanas, who practise some industry, and inhabit Lattakoo, Kur- reechanc, and other considerable towns. On the K S 102 Africa. eastern coast are the Caffres, a handsome, bold, and honest people ; but north from them arie the Zoolas, a most ferocious tribe, who have lately committed dreadful ravages in this part of Africa. 310. On the eastern coast, the Portuguese have Mozambique, Sofala, and Quillimane, at the mouth of the great river Zambese. They draw from the interior, gold, ivory, bees-wax, and slaves. Farther north is Zanguebar, which has been dreadfully ra- vaged by the Galla, and whose coast is chiefly in possession of the imam of Muscat. The GaJla have destroyed Melinda, its former capital; the chief places now are, Mombaza, Magadoxa and Lamoo. Near the coast are the flat fertile islands of Zanzi- bar, Pemba, and Monfla. Farther north is the arid and desolate coast of Ajan ; but Berbera, west fron> Cape Guardafui, is noted for the production of in- cense and odoriferous plants. 311. The island of Madagascar is one of the largest in the world, being 850 miles in length, and 250 in breadth. It is a very fertile country ; but the inhabitants, divided into numerous tribes, are in general barbarous. Radama, one of the most powerful princes of the island, concluded a treaty for the abolition of the slave trade with the English government, and made great eflbrts for the improve- ment of the island, which have been interrupted by his premature death. Off the coast of Madagascar is the French island Bourbon, and to the eastward of that, is the Mauritius, or Isle of France, now be- longing to Great Britain. Off the west coast of Africa is the rocky isle of St. Helena, an English colony and a desirable port, famous as having been Ihe residence of the emperor Napoleon, Ascension, a little to the north of St. Helena, is a small barren i^le; it has a safe and commodious harbouj^ and abounds with flne turtle. The English have an Africa, 103 establishment on this lonely isle. The Cape Verde islands, ten in number, of which the chief are St. Jago and St Antonio, belong to the Portuguese, and produce a valuable breed of asses. 312. The Canary, called anciently the Fortunate, Islands, are a fine group, more to the north. The chief are the Grand Canary and Teneriffe, in which i#the famous Peak, two miles and a half in perpen- dicular height. Madeira, still farther north, is fa- mous for its wine and its healthful climate. SUMMARY OF AFRICA. Kations. Chief Cities. £gypt... Morocco ... Algiers Tunis. Tripoli Abyssinia... BornoUf &c. Houssa. ... States on I Niger J* Nubia Darfur Dahomey... Ashantee ... Western Coast Eastern do. Southern do. Cairo.*, Morocco , Algiers... Tunis.... Tripoli... Gondar.. Bornou., Soccatoo . Timbuctoo.... } Sennaar.... Cobb- Abomey... Coomassie Beniui &c Mozambique Cape Town Pop inMil. 2^ 6 H Oh 3 5 6 20 2 O* 2 4 20 10 1 Religion. Mahometan ... Mahometan ... Mahometan ... Mahometan ... Mahometan... Christian Mahometan ... Mahometan... Mah. & Pagan Mahometan... Mahometan... Pagan ,... Pagan Pagan Pagan & Mah. Pag. Be Christ. Govern- ment. r Turkish \ Viceroy. Despotism. Despotism. Despotism. Despotism. Monarchy. Despotism. Despotism. Despotism. Despotism. Despotism. Despotism. Des^tism. Despotism. .Various. IVarioua. Though we have given the above summary of Africa, it must be observed, that the estimates of the population are «d> tremely uncertain. ^ 104, Oen§ral Facta. GENERAL FACTS, WORTHY OF BEING RBMBMBBRID. Nearly tliree parts of the surface of the Globe are covered with water, or 726 water to 274 land. The land is divided into two Continents; the Eastern, or Old Continent, and Hie American, or newly discovered Continent. The water is divided into Jive great Oceans ; the Pacific, the Indian, the Atlantic, the Northern, and the Southern. The Torrid Zone, the most fertile part of tJie earth, is 47 degrees, or 3250 miles wide. The Temperate Zones are each 43 degrees wide, or 2975 miles wide, and two thirds of the breadth, and are the best adapted to the human constitution. The Aictic or Polar regions are as wide as tht Tropics, but only one sixth of the breadth, and too cold for numan habitation. Europe is the most powerful quarter of the world, and Africa the weakest Russia is the largest empire of the world, but the most thinly inhabited^ China is bvt a fourth of the size of Russia, yet it contains four times the number of inhabitants. Russia, France, and Austria have the greatest military land forces ; amounting, in time of war, to nearly a million of embodied soldiers, England has the greatest naval force ; amounting, in time of war, to one hundred and fifty sail of the line, and one thousand ships of war oj all sizes. The most despotic aiid tyrannic goveminenti ^re those of Morocco and Turkey. '^- TTie freest people, under civil government, oM Uipse of England, aiid of the United States of Anmiriak* Theoldesi government now existing is that of China* CefierHU Facts. 105 In cammercey the English stand at the head of all nations, and in shipping and intercourse transcend all other nations put together. Of colonies, jSngland has the greatest number. Those of Spain were of the greatest extent, hut almost all ^ mem are now independent and free republics. The most mountainous countries in the world are, Thibet and Oentral Asia, Peru, Chile, Columbia, and Switzerland. The most level countries in the world are, Persia^ Arabia, Poland, and Russia. Of ihe SI millions of square miles of land, more than two thirds are mountains, deserts, or fnarshes, and uninhabitable. The most civilised and intelligent quarter of. the world is Europe ; the most barbarous is Africa. The distinguished countries of antiquity are coun- tries of little note in modern times ; as Greece, Asia Minor, Palestine, and Egypt, lately tributary to Turkey ; and Italy, as subdivided, or tributary to '■■ Austria. The most barbarous nations knoum to the nations of antiquity, are the most polished among the mo^ dems ; as Albion, Gallia, Eelgium, and Helvetia ; now Britain; France, tlie Netherlands^ and Swit- zerland. The preponderance of civilisation is in the northern hemisphere^ there beitig no very distinguished nation in the southern hemisphere. The greet natural distinctions of mankind are into Whites, Elacks, Copper.coloured, Tawney, and Red; having jktxen and black hair, straight or woolly. The great social distinctions are into Christian Mahommedan, Eaudhist, or Pagan; and into de~ spotie and free governments. IM PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. I. or THE SEASONS AND CLIMATE&. 1. The axis of the earth, or line on which it turns, makes an angle of nearly 23^ degrees, with a per- pendicular to the plane of its orbit; and, throughout its annual course, keeps the same oblique direction. Wherefore, during one half of its cours^, the North Pole is turned towards the sun; and, during the other half of its course, the South Pole is directed towards the sun : this, in the two hemispheres, is the cause of the different seasons, at opposite times, as Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter. 2. Our northern Spring is in March, April, and May; but the southern Spring is in September, October, and November. 3. Our Summer is in June, July, August, and September; and the southern Summer is in De- cember, January, and February. 4. So our Autumn is in September, October, and November; and the southern Autumn is in March, April, and May. 5. And our Winter is in December, January, Fe- bruary; while the southern Winter is in June, July, and August. 6. The preceding paragraphs apply to all coun- tries north or south of the equator, and to all Europe and Asia, and North America and Africa, as North; and to South America and Africa, to Australia, Madagascar, and various islands, as South. 7* The seasons in the torrid zone are different from the temperate zones. 8. The only distinction within the tropics is itovoL hot and dry, to hot and rainy ; and most countries Of the Seasons, i$c. 107 of the torrid zone have six months inclining to wet| and six months inclining to dry air. Obi. I. During tbo wet season within the tropics^ the rains are not continual, but pour down in floods for several days together, or for several liours in a day. 2. On the western coast of Africa, at Sierra Leone, the wet season is from June to October, and the dry season from Sep- tember to June. About the latter end of June the rains in* crease to torrents, and are accompanied with fatal storms of thunder and lightning. 3. On the Gold coastt the rainy seasons continue from April to October ; and from the end of March to the middle of Sep- tember in the kingdom of Congo. The greatest quantity of rain falls about noon. 4. On the eastern coast, the seasons are the reverse of those on the western coast. Thus, in Sofala, Mosambique, and Zanguebar, the rainy season, or winter, is from September to February. 5. It never rains in Egypt^ and rains are unknown in those countries; yet, in 1817, a part of Grand Cairo was washed away by a water spout. 6. Though the climate of Abyssinia is hot, it is tempered t>y the mountainous nature of the country, which, from April to September, causes heavy rains to fall. These, with others in countries still farther south, occasion the overflowing of the Nile. 9. In Bengal, the hot or dry season begins with March, and lasts till the end of May ; and violent thunder and storms occasionally interrupt the in- tense heat. The rainy season continues from June to September ; the last three months of the year are generally pleasant; but in January and February excessive fogs prevail. Obs, Towards the end of July, all the lower parts of Bengal are overflowed by the Ganges, forming an inundation of more than one himdred miles in extent, nothing appearing but vil- lages and trees, save here and there an elevated spot resembling an island. 10. On the coasts of Malabar and Coromandfel opposite seasons are produced by the chains of the 108 Of Mtf SeasofiMf Sfe» mountains, which run from north to south along the western side of the peninsula of India, and pre- cipitate the great masses of clouds which they in- tercept On the coast of Coromandel, the rainy season begins with the north-east monsoon, or from October to April ; and on the Malabar coast with the south-west monsoon, or from May to Sep- tember. Obt, In the month of September the na?igation on tht Malabar coast is open, and ships begin to sail from thence till May to all parts of the world : on the Coromandel shore tlie navigation is uninterrupted from April to October. 11. The Andes divide Peru and Chili into two different climates ; for, while it is summer in the mountainous parts, it is winter in the valleys. Ob$, Winter begins on the mountains in December ; in the ▼alleys this is the first summer month ; and a journey of four hours conducts the traveller from one season to another. 12. The coasts confined on the west of the Andes are, in general, dry, whilst the extensive countries on the east of that chain are deluged with torrents of rain, from the Trade Winds blowing over the Atlantic from the east • Obs, Travellers, on the Andes, have frequently enjoyed s delightful serenity on these elevated regions, at the same time tbsA they have heard the frightful noise of tempests discharging themselves on the lovr country t they have seen lightnings issue from the clouds, and have heard the thunder roll far beneath their feet. 13. Rain is seldom or never seen at Lima; but the valleys are watered with a strong dew. Obi, This country is much subject to earthquakes : in that of 1747, when tlie port of Callao was submerged, and out of 4000 inhabitants, scarcely 200 escaped. In 1812, the city of Caraccas was nearl;^ destroyed by a dreadf&l earthquake. 14. In Brazil^ the wet season usually begins in Of the Seas&nit ifC 109 March or April, and ends in August, when spring, or rather summer, commences. Ob9, The nights are very cold throughout the whole year ; •nd tboie of fuininer more wo than those in winter. 15, In Jamaica, the rainy season commences in May, and July is always very wet. In the begin- ning of August, the weather is uncommonly close. Hurricanes are frequent in September and October. 16** In Guatimala, it rains from the beginning of May to the beginning of November ; the other siiS months of the year are hot and dry. 17. The frigid zone, including Greenland, Lap- land, &c. has only two seasons, winter and summer ; twilight, or perpetual sunshine, for weeks or months. Obs, 1. The long night of winter is very severe, the sun never appearing above the horizon. The most rapid rivers aire then frozen from five to six feet deep ; tlie largest lakes and bays are also frozen so as to bear any weight; and rocks are burst by the intensity of the frosc. 2. The brilliancy of the stars, the Aurora Borealis, and the full moon, which never sets, make some atonement for the sun's absence. The lung twilight, also, which precedes the sun's rising, and lingers after its setting, considerably diminishes the time of total darkness. 3. The transition, in the frigid zone, from winter's frost to summer's heat, is amazingly rapid. The short summer is very hot, but foggy; and the contiuL^i sunshine enables the inha- bitants to lay up provisions for the dreary winter. 18. The western and middle parts of Africa are the hottest on the earth ; because the Trade Winds, in passing over the sandy deserts of this immense continent, become heated to an extreme degree before they arrive at the western coast. Oba. On the American continent the climate is much colder than on the eastern in similar parallels of latitude ; and the eastern pans of both continents are colder than the western. 19. Canada, in North America, which is nearly no Of the Seasons, fVindst Sfc. under the same parallels as Franco, has its \vintcr8 almost OS severe as tliose of Petersburg. Ob§, Tlie river St. Laiirrcnoe» notwithstanding iti gri>nt breadth, is sometimes frozen, the whole of the winter, sufficiently strong to bear oarrioges on its glassy bosom. Canada is also regularly covered with snow from October till April, hut so hard as to bear travelling on it. The air too is very dry. 20. Philadelphia and New York, which are nearly in the same parallel with Madrid, have frequently very severe winters ; but these are compensated by the excessive heat of the summer. 21. In the southern hemisphere the ctold, in tiii; same latitude, is much greater than in the northern. Obt. 1. The climate of Terra del Fuego is an instance of this truth. It is as far south as Newcastle is north 4 yet Captain Cook, who was there nt midsummer, found the cold so excessive, tliat a party of his men, who were botanising on thu hills, narrowly escaped perishing. 2. Captain Parry approached within nine degrees of the North Pole ; but Weddell could get no nearer the South Pole than witliin sixteen degrees. Yet two Russian frigates sailed to within eleven degrees. 22. The weather is commonly more settled on great continents than in islands. The heat of sum- mer is greater in the former ; and the cold of winter is less intense in the latter. Obt* In islands the heat is tempered by clouds and vapour from the surrounding sea; and, from the same cause, the weather is inconstant. Hence, also, the cold of winter is mi- tigated ; and, generally, the frost is of short duration. This is particularly the case with the British Isles. m II. OF THE WINDS. 23. The wind is air put in motion, either gently or violently; and this is occasioned, chiefly, by heat. 24. Every degree of heat expands air a 480th part ; and then the light and heated air rises, and Of the Windu 111 the motion of cooler nir to supply its place forms the eurrert which wc call wind. 06«. 1. Jlitt Bun, while vortical at «ny pliice, heats and ex- pandi the air ; and then, m the earth turns under the Kun from west to easti so tiiut tJio sun moves westward, so a regular eost wind follows the sun, called the trade wind. 3. This regular wind is, however, varied by currents from the east and south-east, and these again are varied by land, mountains, changes of seasons, rain, snow, &c. 25. There are four principal winds, the norths westy souths and easty which receive their names from the four points of the horizon, and which are called also the cardinal points, lOui. I. The north wind in our hemisphere blows from the northern frigid zone, and is always the coldest. 3. Tlie 80%Uh windf to Europeans, &o. is the warmest, par- ticularly during the summer months, because it comes from the torrid zone, where the sun is vertical. S. The east wind is the driest, because, in coming to us, it crosses the continent of Asia, which is but little watered by seas or rivers. 4. The west wind is usually accompanied with rnin, because, in its passage over the great Atlantic Ocean, it combines great quantities of vapours, which the mountains and hills precipitate as rain. 26. M^ind travels at tho rate of 50 or 60 miles an hour, in a great storm ; in a common brisk wind, tlie rate is about 15 miles an hour; and gentle zephyrs move not even one or two miles. 27. There are three kinds of tropical winds, which blow almost always from the western point of the compass: — 1. The general east trade^vjindSf extending to nearly 30 degrees of latitude, on each side of the equator, in the Atlantic and the Pacific Oceans. Obt* These winds blow from tne north-east, on the north side of the equator ; and from tlie south-east, on its southern side : near the equator, their direction is almost from due east. 2. The monsoons, or shifting trade- winds, blow L . 2 119 Of Earthquakes. fix inontlis in ono direction, and during the other •ix months in the opposite direction. ObB, Tlicy prevail In tlit Indian or EMtcm Occ«n, ntid •«ldotn extend beyond 500 miles fnim the land. Their change, at the vernal and autumnal equinox, in accompanied with ter. rible atormi of rain, lightning, and thunder. The monsooni •rise from chainn of mountains which direct the wind, occn- nioncd by tlie coid air moving towardu thoae parts in which the air is rarefied l)y the sun's heat. 3. The land and sea breezes are periodical winds tliat blow from tho land, from night till about mid- day ; and from the sea from about noon to midnight owing to the increased heat of the land. 28. Though the general tendency of the winds i» from a colder to a hotter region, yet, beyond the latitude of 30 degrees, they are more or less vari- ible ; as we perceive in Britain and Europe. 29. Winds, passing for a considerable time over highly heated land, become sometimes so scorching and suffocating, as to be attended with dreadful effects. These winds, under the name of Solanos, are often felt in the Desert of Arabia and the in- terior of Africa. III. OF EARTHQUAKES. SO. For the same reason that we illustrated tlie various winds, we are now to elucidate earthquakes^ which are of two kinds : — 1. One kind, caused by the action of subter- raneous agents and the explosion of volcanoes, is felt only at small distances, and always attended by eruptions or openings of the ei^th. 2. Another kind, felt at great distances, shakes extensive tracts of ground without any eruptions taking place, and is therefore followed by less dread- ful consequences. (ff the Tulet, 113 ()bM. or atl tlir phenomena of nature, cartbqunkei art %\m most terriflo and dvftCrucliv«. They KcUloni occur in th« liritifth Ulandi; but, in 1755, Linliun ww dentrovvd by on«, and thoy are of nearly annual occurrence in Sicily, and in tht West Indian an I £ait Indian inlands, and in Mt&ioo and Peru. IV. Of THE TIDES. 31. Those regular motions of thr sea, according to which it ebbs and flows twice in twenty-four hours, are called the Tides. lllua, 1. When the sea, in its flux, has risen for about sii hours, it remains, as it were, suspended and in equilibrio for some minutes ; and at that time it is called high water* S2. When, Jn its reflux, the sea has fallen for about six houry it remains, in like manner, as it were, suspended and in cqulli* brio ; and at that time it is called Imo water, 32. The tides are occasioned by the attraction of the moon, through which the water is raised upwards in those parts of the sea to which that planet is opposite. //7us. 1. The tides arc greatest at the new and full moons, and are called gpring^tides : they are least at the flrst and last quadratures, and are called neap-tidet ; and the highest tides are near the times of the equinoxes. 2. When the moon is in the northern hemisphere, and in the meridian above the horizon, it produces a greater tide than when it is in the meridian below it ; and, when in the southern hemisphere, the reverse is the case. 3. For the same reason, when the moon is in the southern signs, the greatest tides on the other side of the equator will be when it is below our horizon ; and when it is above it the tides will be least. 1 1 114 Of the Saltness of the Sea, V. SALTNESS OF THE SEA. S3. Sea -water is salt ; and, except the Caspian and some other inland seas, whose waters are brackish, the waters of lakes and rivers are mild, sweet, and fit for human purposes. Plus, 1. Salt is one of the original principles in nature, and is mixed, in greater or less quantities, with all other sub- stances. All rivers run into the sea, and therefore carry some salt with them ; but no rivers run out of it, nor is any water *9ken out of it, except by exhalation and evaporation ; and no salt ascenris in either of these ways: it has consequently been inferred, without supposing great beds of salt originally de- posited in the bottom of the sea, that the immense number of rivers which run into it carry with them a sufficient quantity of salt to give to the whole body of waters of the deep that saltness which, with their motions and currents, preserves them from putrefaction. 2. It is obvious that no salt ascends from the sea, because rain water, which falls from the clouds that were originally exhaled from the sea, is the sweetest, purest, and lightest ot all waters, and is made the standard by which philosophers judge of all other waters. 3. Hence many contrivances have been adopted for distilling sea-water at sea for ordinary use on ship-board ; and hence the pits or pans for making salt on many coasts of the sea. VI. OF THE AURORA BOREALIS. S4f, In illustrating the two seasons of the year in the frigid zone (north), we had occasion to mention the benefit derived from the Aurora JBorealis : we shall now describe it. 35. That shining light which is often seen by night in the heavens, and which is vulgarly called the northern lights, or streamers, is the Aurora JBorealis, which, till the month of March, 1716, wtu* not 'much observed in England. Obt. This phenomeno'- is supposed to be the result of eUc- tricul fluid passing froi. one region -. ^'^^ 6^ '^ 'v- 125 THE USE OF J-HE GLOBES. d9. A GLOBE, or SPHBRB^ \9 a body crery way perfectly round. Artificial globe is a term more particularly used to denote a globe of metal, plaster^ paper, pasteboard, &c. If, upon such a globe, the several contments, empires, kingdoms, countries, cities, oceans, seas, rivers, &c., that are spread over the surface of our earth, be accurately deline- ated, it will form what is called a terresieiai g\ohe *, and is so named in contradistinetion to the celestial globe, which is an inverted representation of the starry heavens, upon a similar globe or sphere. The use of these artificial globes is to illustrate the leading principles of geography and astronomy. For this purpose a number of circles, &c, arc drawn upon them, and others may be represented by the apparatus or furniture with which they are generally supplied. 100. The Axis of the earth is an imaginary line passing through its centre, about which its diurnal rotation is performed, thereby causing an apparent revolution of the whole heavens, with all the visible bodies contained therein, in the same time that the earth takes to turn, upon its axis, but • The figure of the earth is not, strictly speaking, that of a true sphere, but of an oblate spheroid, being a little com^ pressed at the polar, and swelled out at the equatorial, regions. According to the most recent experiments and observations, the equatorial diameter is 7925*648 miles; the polar 7899*170; their difference, 26*478 nailes. The proportion of these diame- ters is very nearly 299 to 298 ; and, consequently, their difference >^ sIb ^^. ^1*® greater, being too little to require or to admit of any deviation from a true sphere, even in the largest of those artificial globes usually constructed to represent the earth wad Heavens. M 3 ^m 196 Vuof^ht Gldfes. in a direction exactly the reverse of that in which its rotation is performed. This line is represented bj the wire on which the artificial globe turns. 101. The Poles of the earth are the extreme ends of the axis. That on the north is called tho arcHcy and that on the south the antarctic pole. The celestial poles are those two imaginary points in the heavens through which the earth's axis, produced each way to the sphere of the heavens, would pass. 102. The BRASS Meridian is the ring or circle in which the artificial globe is suspended by means of the axis ; it is divided into four quadrants, of 90 degrees each. Two of these are numbered from the equator towards the poles, for the purpose of showing the latitudes of places, or the declinations of the celestial bodies : the other two quadrants are num- bered from the poles towards the equator, and are used for elevating the poles of the globe. 103. The circles on the globe are of two kinds, ffreai and smalL Great circles are those whose planes pass through the centre of the globe, divid- ing it into two equal parts. Small circles are those whose planes do not pass througu the centre of the globe, which, consequently, they divide into two unequal parts. 104. AH circles, whether great or small, are sup- posed to be divided into 360 equal parts, called degrees ; each degree into sixty equal parts, called minutes ; and each minute into sixty equal parts, called seconds. Degrees are marked with a small cipher, minutes with one little dash, and seconds with two dashes ; thus, 44° 10' 12" signifies forty- four degrees, ten minutes, twelve seconds. 105. A Hemisphere is half the surface of the globe; every great circle, therefore, divides the globe into two hemispheres. 106. The Equator is a great circle, dividing Use of the Globes. 19( the globe into two equal parts, called the northern and southern hemispheres. In reference to the heavens, this circle is called the Equinoctial^ be- cause, when the sun appears in it, the nights and days are equal all over the world. 107. Meridians are semicircles, cutting the equator at right angles, and extending from pole to pole» Every place must be supposed to have its own meridian, though there are commonly only twenty-four meridians drawn upon the globe, one of which passes through every fifteenth degree of the equator. This deficiency is, however, provided for by the brass meridian, which, as the globe re* volves on its axis, becomes a meridian to every point on its surface. When, by the diurnal rotation of the earth on its axis, the meridian of any place (not within the polar circles) comes under the sun, it is said to be noon or mid- day at that place. 108. The First Meridian is that from which the longitude of places is reckoned. Modern geo- graphers assume the meridian of the capital city, or principal observatory, of their own country as a first meridian; thus English geographers reckon their longitude from the meridian passing through the royal observatory at Greenwich. 109. The Ecliptic is the circle in which the plane of the earth's orbit, supposed to be extended in every direction, meets the sphere of the heavens^ and is consequently the path in which the sun appears to perform his annual revolution, at the mean rate of about one degree in a day. This circle makes an angle of 23° 28' 27" with the equinoctial, which it cuts in two opposite points, called the equi* noctiid points. It is divided into 12 equal parts, called signs, each occupying 30° of its circumfer- ence. The signs commence at the vernal equinox { their names, and the characters by which they ara 138 Uic of the Glubet. denoted, are as follows: Aries T* Taurus b» Ge- mini n, Cancer 2Z» Leo Sit Virgo >Vy Libra ^ 8oorpio ni, Sagittarius t » Capricomus Vf , Aqua. rius sSt Pisces K* The ecliptic is merelv drawn on Uie terrestrial globe for the convenience of working some of the problems. 110. The Zodiac in tlie heavens is a space ex- tending eight or nine degrees on each side of the ecliptic, within which the motions of the moon and the principal planets are performed. 111. The Equinoctial Points are the two points in which the ecliptic and equator intersect each tither. Thev are so called, because, when the sun is in either of them, the day and night are equal all over the world. They are the first points of Aries and Libra. 112. llie Solstitial Points are the two points of the ecliptic at the greatest distance from the equator. They are so named because, when the sun is near either of them, his meridian altitude con- tinues nearly the same for several days together They are the first points of Cancer and CapMcorn. lis* The CoLURES are two great circles perpen- dicular to the equator and to each other. One of them passes through the equinoctial points, and is called the EquinoctUU Colure; the other passes through the solstitial points, and is called the Sol^ ttiiial Colure, 114. The Tropics are two small circles parallel to the equator (or equinoctial), and po^sin^ through the solstitial points: the northern is odled the Tropic of Cancer, Mid the southern the- Tropic of Cc^pTteoffu 115. The Polar Circles are two small circles parallel to the equator, and situated at the same distance from the poles as the tropics are from the equator. That which surrounds the North Pole i» V$e of the. Globes. 129 failed the aretiCf and that surrounding the South Pole the antarctic, circle. The whole surface of the torrestial globe is divided by the tropics and the polar circles into five zones, viz. one torrid^ two tern* perate, and ivro frigid zones. 115. The Torrid Zone comprehends the whole space between the tropics which bound it on the north and south. The breadth of this zone is 46^ $&• 116. The Two Temperate Zones, which are the spaces between the tropics and the polar circles, are designated north or south, as they are in the northern or southern hemispheres ; each of these occupies a space of 43® 4'. 117. The TWO Frigid Zones are the spacetr within the polar circles, each having one of the poles for its centre. 118. The Zenith is the point of the heavens immediately over our heads: it is the elevated pole of our horizon. 119. The Nadir is the point in the heavens im- mediately under our feet, and is the depressed pole of our horizon. The horizon is either sensible or rational. 120* The Sensible Horizon is the circle which bounds our view on an extensive plain, and in which tiie earth and sky seem to meet. 221. The Rational Horizon is an imaginary circle, the plane of which passes through the centre of the earth, parallel to the plane of the sensible Aorizo^: it divides the heavens into two equal parts, called the visible and invisible hemispheres^ This circle is represented by 122. The Wooden Horizon, circumscribing the artificial globe, whieh is commonly divided by seve* ral concentric circles. The first or innermost of these is marked amplitude, and is numbered from the cast and west points, towards the north and ISO Uh of the GlobeM. •outh> to show the distance of any object firom the east or west points of the horison* The second, marked azimuth^ is numbered firom the north and south points, towards the east and west, to shew tlie distance of any object firom the north or south points of the horizon. The third contains tho paints rfthe company divided into half and quarter points ; the degrees answering to which are to be found in the azimuth circle. The fourth circle contains the signs of the zodiac^ with the character appropriated to each sign. The fifth contains the degrees of the signsy each sign comprehending 30°. The sixth contains the days of the months answe^-'ng to each degree of the sun's place in the ecliptic. The seventh contains the names of the twelve calendar months, 123. The Latitude or any Place is its dis- tance north or south from the equator, and is reckoned in degrees and minutes on the meridian of the place, as far as 90^ in both directions. 124. The Longitude of any Place is the dis- tance of the meridian of that place from the first meridian, and is either east or west, as the place is eastward or westward from that meridian. The greatest longitude any place can have is 180^ or half the circumference of the globe. Obt, 'Longitude, at any giyen plaoe on the earth, is measured in fNtZM on the small circle parallel to the equator passing through that place. But as the parallel circles become smaller and smaller as they are at a greater distance from the equator, while the number of degrees in every circle is constantly S60, the length of a degree of longitude must necessarily decrease as the latitude becomes greater. The following table shovrs, in British miles, the length ot a degree of the parallel passing through every fifth degree of latitude on a sphere whose diameter is equal to'the equatorial diameter of the earth ; -^ Problems an the Terrestrial Globe. 131 D«greMof Miles. Degrees of MHm. Degrees of MIIm. Latitude. Latitude. Latitude. 69*16 ! 85 56*65 65 29*83 S 68*90 40 58*98 70 23*65 10 68*11 45 48*90 75 17*90 15 66*80 50 44*45 80 12-01 SO 64*99 S5 39*67 85 6-03 95 63*68 60 34*58 90 0*00 «. 59-89 1 PROBLEMS ON THE TERRESTRIAL GLOBE. Problem t. — To find the latitude and longitude of any given place ; also to find all those places that have the same longitude and the same latitude as the place given. Rule, — Turn the globe on its axis, till the given place comes under that part of the brazen meridian which is numbered from the equator towards the poles : the degree immediately over the place is the latitude sought, which is north or south, as the place is north or south of the equator ; the degree of the. equator, which is intersected by the brass meridian, is the longitude of the given place, which is east or west, as the place lies to the right or left of the meridian passing through London. All those places which lie immediately under the graduated edge of the meridian, from pole to pole, have the same longitude as the given place ; and, if the globe be turned round on its axis, all places passing im- mediately under the observed latitude have the same latitude as that place. All places from 66° 28' north, to eff" 28' south latitude, having the same longitude, will have noon, or any other hour of the day, at the same time;. 1S9 Problems en ih€ Terreiirial Gioh. but the length of their natural day varies in dif. ferent latitudes : all places under the same latitude have the same length of day and night ; but the hour of the day varies with the difference of longitude. BfomfU 1. Rcquirfd the latitude and longitude of Pekln; alto what placet have the mno, or nearly the wme^ longitudi^ and the tame latitudoi at that place. Aimotr, The Utitude of Pckin it aliotit 40° N., and tbt longitude about 11<^ £. t the placet hairing nearly the mim longitude are, the island of Palawan, the eattem partt of lior. neo» the itUuui of Lombock, the wettem parti sf New Holland, &o. ; the placet having nearly the tame latitude are» Coo. ttantinoplck CagliaH, Minorca, Toledo, Philadelphia* &c S. What are the latitude and longitude of Quebec ? also^ what other placet have the tame, or nearly the tame, latUudi and longitude? 8. Required the btitude and longitude of Cape Coroorin; alto^ when it b noon at Cape Comorin, at what other placci it it ooon likewite ; and what placet have the tame length of day and night. 4. Reqidred the latitude and longitude of the following placet; and what other placet have the tame longitude and latitude at thote placet respectively : — Hobart Town> Nankin, Stockholm, Itpahan, Palermo, Washington* Meeea, Rio Janeiro, York* Problem II. — To find the difference of laHtvde of any two places. Rule. ~ Find the latitude of each of the given places (by Prob. I.) ; then, if the places are both on the same side of the equator, take the difference of their latitudes ; but if they are on opposite sideS) take the sum. Problem III.— To find the difference of longituds of any two places. Rule. — Find the longitude of each of the given places (by Prob. 1.); then, if tlie places are both Probkm an ike Terresirial GUJm. 1S8 on the tame tide of the first meridian, take the difference of their longitudes ; but if they are on opposite sides, talce the sum. If the sum, in tho latter case, exceeds 180^, subtract it from 860^ BawmpU 1. What it th« diffi^renoo of Utitudt sad tbs dif. frraaot of kmsitudo of M«iioo and Port Jaokion ? Antw€r, DTflbrtncc of Utitud«» 53^^* i diflRirenos of lon- gitude, 1094''. fl. Required the diflbrenoe of latitude and diflTerenoe of longitude of the following placet : — » London and Cape Horn* Alexandria and Cadii« St Helena and North Cape, Mount Heckla and Vetuviuii Litbon and Cape Farewell, Straitt of Magellan and Bher- ing*t Straitt, Calcutta and Naples. Problem IV. — 77ie longitude and laHhtde of any place being given, to find that place. Rule, — Find the given longitude on the equator, and bring it to the brazen meridian, then under Uie given latitude will be found the place required. Example 1. What place is that whote longitude it about 17** W., and Utitude 32 J® N. ? Answer, Madeira Isle. 2. Wliat places have the following longitudes and latitudea? liong; Lat. Long. Lat. 5® E. 18) £. so £. 52*0 N. 34i S. 3li N. 102'' E. 43i W. 1494 W. 23 & 17^ S. Problem V. — To find the distance on a great circle between any two places. Rule. — Lay the graduated edge of the Quadrant of Altitude t over both places; the degrees on the * The longitudes and lati.ides, here and throughout the problems, are given to the nearest quarter of a degree. t The Quadrant of Altitude is a thin flexible strip of brass, which can be screwed to any part of the brass Meridian ; and is divided into degrees, &c., corresponding to the radiua of the Globe, N 154 Frobitmt om the Terrtstrtai GM*f. quadmnt comprehended between the two plar(>s multiplied by 60, will give their distance in gcogru. phicai miles, or, if multiplied by 69*2| will give tli« distance in Englbh miles.* Examfit 1. Required the dltcanee between the Ussrd Point and the itUmd of Bermudea. Annter, Ahout 47^ ■ 8830 geographietl, or 8959 Englisli, milce. 9. Required the dittanoe in geographical and Engllili milct between the following plaoea x — Cape Verd and Cape Guar- dafbi, Pondicherry and Dencoolen, Cape Horn and Cape of Good Hope, Owhvhee and Amboyna, London and Liibon, Stockholm and Maaulipntuin, Bombay and Edinburf^li, North Capo and Candi. Problem VI. — To find the Antceci, Periceci, and Antipodei to the inhabiianti of any place, Def, The Aniaci are those who live under the same meridian, but on opposite sides of t!ie equator, and equally distant from it : — the Perifpci are those who live on the same parallel of latitude, but under the opposite meridian : — the Antipodes are those who live in opposite hemispheres, arc equally distant from the equator, and are also under opposite meridians. All these may be shown at once on the globe by the following Hule. — Bring the poles of the globe into the lio- rizon, and the given place to the eastern part of that eircle ; then, if the given place be in north latitude, observe, on the amplitude circle, how many degrees it is north of the eastern point of the horizon : the same number of degrees southward of the eastern point will show the^nta'ct; an equal number of degrees, counted from the west point of the horizon * A degree of the equator contains about 69*16 English miles : 69*2 is near enough the truth for common purposes PrMcmt on th§ Terrestrial Globe. 135 towards the north, will show the Periced ; and tlie same number of degrees, counted towards the south from the wt^st, will point out the Antipodes. The same rule will apply if the given place be in south latitude, by reading nouth for north, and vice versd. Example 1. Required the antoclt periacl, and Antipodes of the innabitante of the Cape of Good I lope. Antwtr, Antaci, north of tlie Gulf of Sidra in the Medi- terranean Sea. — - Ptiiad, in the South Pacific Ocean, east of New Zealand. -i-i^n/tpodsf, in the North Pacific Ocean, north- west of the island of Donna Maria Libera. ii. Required the antoeci, periceci, and antipodes to tht inhabitanta of the following placea : ^^ Moeoow, Quebec, Bahhw JeruMileii^ Pekin. Archangel. Problem VII. — The hour at any place being given^ to find w/tat hour it is in any other place. Rule. Bring the place at which the hour is given to the meridian, and set the index to the given hour ; then turn the globe till the other place comes to the meridian, and the index will show the re* quired time.* * If the difTercnce of longitude l)etween two places and the time at one of them be Icnown, the time at the other may lie easily found by calculation. It is noon at any place when the meridian of that place is immediately under the sun ; and since the earth^s rotation with retpect to the eun is performed in exactly twenty-four hour§t there must be a revolution of 15^ of the equator in one hour of time, or, in other words, 15° oi the equator will corre!^nd to one liour of time. 1° of the equator to four minutes of time, I' of the equator to four se- conds of time, &c. Hence it follows, that the difference of longitude of any two places may bo converted into time by only multiplying by 4 ; observing that minutes of longitude, when so multiplied, produce seconds of time, and degrees of longitude produce minutes of time. The diff*erence of longi. tttde in time between the two places being thus found, if that for which the answer is sought lie to the east of that at which N 2 *I36 Problems on the Terrestrial Globe. Example 1. When it is eight o'clock in tho morning at Lon- don, what time itai Wasliington? Aiuwcr, About a quartei to three in tne morning? ?. When It is noon at London, what is the time at Rome ? S. >Vnen it is ten in the morning at Canton, what time is it at Jerusalem? 4. When it is seven o'clock r. m. at Lima, what time is it at London ? 5. When it is four in the afternoon at Porto Bcllo, what hour is it at Aberdeen, Ispahan, Sierra Leone, Algiers, Aca- puico, Medina, and Naples ? Problem VIII. — To find the sutls pUice in the ecliptic for any given day. Rule. — Find the given day in the circle of months on the horizon, against which, in the ciicle of signs, will be seen the degree of the sign in which the sun is for that day. The same sign and degree in the ecliptic is the sun's place required. Example I. Required the sun*s place in the ecliptic on tlie 16th of August ? Antwer, The 23d degree of Leo. 2. Required the sun's place in the ecliptic on each of the following days : — • the time is given, count the difference of time forward from the given hour ; but if it lie to the west, reckon the dit- ference of time backward from that hour, and the result will be the required time at the place proposed. Thus, suppose the difference of longitude between two places to be 88° 29', and the time at the more westerly to be two o'clock p. m. then 88° 29' x 4 = 5'» 53 " 56' for the difference of longitude in time; which, added to the given time, because tlie place for which the time is sought lies to the east, gives 53m 568 past seven, or 6m 4 s to eight o'clock in the evening for the time required. As the index circle is small, and the index itself liable to be out of order, it is better to avoid using it altogether, and to count the time on the equator by the above rule. Every me* ridian marked on the globe counts one hour ; and the degrees over, multiplied by 4, give the minutes* Problems on Hie Terrestrial Globe, 137 Ist January, 2l8t March, 22d June, lit August, 15th October, 20th November? Problem IX. To find the sun's declination on any given day^ and all the places to which he will be vertical on that day,* jRule. — Find the sun*8 place in the ediptic (by Prob. VIII.) and bring it to the brazen meridian ; the degree which stands immediately over the sun's place is his declination. Turn the globe on its axis, and all the places that pass under that degree will have the sun vertical on the given day. Example 1. What is the sun*s declination, and to what places will he be vertical on the 14th of November? Answer. His declination is about 18*^ S., and he will be vertical to the island of Otaheite, the New Hebrides, part of the Friendly Isles, Arica in Peru, &c. 2. What is the sun's declination, and to what places wiU he be vertical, on each of the following days : — 24th June, 20th March, 15th July, 10th February, 18th November, 21st Dec? Problem X. — The day of the month and hour of the day at any place being given^ to find wJtere the sun is then vertical. Rule, — Find the sun's declination (by Prob. IX.), and mark it on the brass meridian ; then bring the given place to the meridian, and set the index to the given hour. Turn the globe till the index points to twelve at noon, and the place exactly under the sun's declination on the brazen meridian will have the sun vertical at the given time. Example 1. When it is one o'clock in the morning ai T^ondon on the 20th of January, where is the sun vertical ? * On most terrestrial globes there is a scale> called the ana- lemma, placed on one of the meridians, which shows the sun's declination for every day of the year, N 3 138 Problems on the Terrestrial Globe. Answer. At New Caledonia. 2. Where is the sun vertical on the 21st of December, when it is ten in the evening at London ? 3. Where is the sun vertical on the IQth of June, when it it two in the morning at Cadiz ? 4. Whea it is six o*clock in the morning at Rio Janeiro on tlic Aih of July, where is the sun vertical ? 5. When it is half past seven o'clock in the evenmg at New York on the 5th of September, where is the sun vertical? Problem XL — A place being given in the Torrid Zoney to find tlie two days of the year on which the sun will be vertical to that place. Rule, — Find the latitude of the given place, (by Prob. I.) ; turn the globe on its axis, and ob- serve what two points of the ecliptic pass under that latitude ; seek those points of the ecliptic on the circle of signs on the horizon, and against them, in the circle of months, will be found the days re- quired. ♦ Example 1. On what two days of the year will the sun be vertical at Barbadoes ? Answer, On the 18th of August and the 25th of April. 2. Requiced the two days of tlie year on which the sun is vertical to each of the following places : — St. Helena, Quito, Cape Ambro, Trincomale, Candi, Port Royal, Felew Islands, Dominica, Cape St. Roquc? Problem XII. — To rectify tite globe for the latitude of any given place. Rule* — Elevate the north or south pole, according as the latitude is north or south, so many degrees above the horizon as are equal to the latitude of the given place. * Or rather, having found the latitude of the place, observe the two days on the Analcmma which pass under the same de(jree of latitude. Problems on the Teiresirial Globe, 139 Problem XIII. — To find at what hour the mn fises and sets, and the length of day and nighty at any place not in the Frigid Zones. Rule, — Rectify the globe for the latitude of the given place ; find the sun's place in the ecliptic, bring it to the brass meridian, and set the index to twelve ; bring the sun's place to the western edge of the horizon, and the index will show the time of his setting, which, doubled, will give the length of the day ; turn the globe till the sui *8 place comes to the eastern edge of the horizon, and the index will point out the time of his rising, which, doubled, will give the length of the night. Example 1. What time does the sun rise and set at London on the 2 1 St of June, and what is the length of the day and night? Answer. The sun rises about a quarter before /our, and sets about a quarter past eight ; the length of the day, therefore, is sixteen and a haJ^ and the length of the night seven and a half hours.* 2. At what time does the sun rise and set, and what is the length of the day and night, at the following places on the respective days mentioned : — Formosa, 16th of April, Barcelona, 10th of May, Falkland Isles, 12th August, Candia, 4th of September, Berlin, 1 8th of November ? Bagdad, 4th of August, Copenhagen, 6th of March, Madeira, 4th of June, Quebec, 10th of October, Lima, 14th of May, S. What is the length of the longest day at each of the fol- lowing places : — Corinth, Stockholm, Botany Bay? Problem XIV. — The day of the month and the hour of the day at any place being given, to find all * The 21st of June is tlie longest day at all places in the northern hemisphere, and the 21st of December is the longest day at all places in the southern hemisphere, not within the Frigid Zones. f40 Problems on the Terrestrial Globe. those places of the earth where tJie sun is then rising, those places where the sun is setting^ those where it is noony and those where it is midnighty those that have morning twilight, and those that have evening twilight. Rule, — Find the place to which the sun is ver- tical at the given time (by Prob. X.), bring tliat place to the meridian, and elevate the pole till its altitude is equal to the sun's declination. Then to all places just along the western edge of the horizon^ the sun is rising ; to those along the eastern cd^^e, he is setting ; to those under that part of the brass meridian, which is above the horizon, it is noon ; to those immediately under that part of the brass me- ridian which is below the horizon, it is midnight; those places which are below, but within eighteen degrees of, the western edge of the horizon, have morning twilight ; and those below the eastern ho- rizon, but within eighteen degrees of it, have eveuing twilight. Example 1. When it is ten o*c]ock in the morning at Lon- don on the longest day, to what places is the sun rising, setting, &c. &c. ? Answer, It is rising at Lake Superior, St. Domingo, &c. Setting at Jesso, Niphon, Mindanao, Celebes, &c. Noon at Alexandria, Odessa, Petersburg, &c. Midnight near the Sandwich and Society Isles, &c. Morning twilight at Peru, Chili, Patagonia, &c. ; and evening twilight at the Pelcw Islands, Moluccas, the western coast of New Holland, &c. 2. When it is six o*clock in the morning at Minorca on the 17th of December, where is the sun rising, setting, &c. ? 3. To what places is the sun rising, to what places is it setting, where is it noon, where is it midnight, &c. on the loth of December, when it is eight o'clock in the evening at London ? 4. When it is midnight at Juan Fernandez on the 10th of June, where is it mid-day, and where is tlie sun rising, sctiing> and on the meridian ? Problems on the Terrestrial Globe. 'i4fl Problem XV.— To find the length of total day at any place within the polar circles. JRule, — Rectify the globe for the latitude of the given place. Turn it on its axis, and observe the two points of the ecliptic, which come exactly to the north or south points of the horizon, according as the latitude of the given place is north or south. Find the corresponding two days in the circle of months on the horizon ; the first is that on which total day begins, the second that on which it ends, and the interval between them the time of its con- tinuance. Example 1. What is the length of continual sunshine in the north of Spitzbergen, latitude 80 J^ north ? Answer, Continual day begins on the 14th of April, and ends on the 28th of August, being about 136 days. 2. Required the length of continual day at Lancaster Sound ? 3. How long does the sun continue to shine without setting at the following places : ~- Melvllle Island, North Cape, New Siberia? Problem XVI. — To find the sun*s meridian alti" tude at any place on any given day. Rule, — Rectify the globe for the latitude of the place. Find the sun's place in the ecliptic, and bring it to the brass meridian ; the number of de- grees on the meridian between the horizon and the sun's place, is the altitude required. Example 1. What is the sun's meridian altitude at London on the 21st of December? * Answer 15"^. 2. Required the sun's meridian altitude at the following places on the respective days mentioned : — Madras on the 4th of June, Cape Horn on the 1 2th of May, Quito on the 20th of March, Cape of Good Hope, 4th April, Borne on Christmas-day, Barcelona on the 21st of Dec. 148 Probiems ok the Tcrrtsirial Glohn. Froblbm XVII. — To find the 8un*s altitude and azimuth at any place^the day and hour being given. Rule. — Rectify the globe for the latitude of the place, and screw the quadrant of altitude on the brass meridian over that latitude; bring the sun's place in the ecliptic to the brass meridian, and set the index to 12 ; turn the globe till the index points to the given hour ; bring the graduated edge of the quadrant to coincide with the sun's place ; then the number of degrees on the quadrant, counting from the horizon to the sun's place, will be the sun's altitude, and the number of degrees on the horizon reckoned from the north or south point thereof to the graduated edge of the quadrant will show the azimuth. Example 1. What is the sun's altitude and atimuth at tlic Cape of Good Hope at half past three o'clock, r. m., oh the 14th of January? Antwer, The altitude is 43°, and the azimuth 90^, or due west. 2. What is the sun's altitude and azimuth at the following places, the day c^the month and hour of the day at each being as under : — London at ten o'clock in the morning on the 1 0th of May, Gibraltar at two o'clock in the afternoon on the 27th of July, Nankin at eight o'clock in the morning on the 20th of March, Rome at eleven o'clock in the morning on the 15th of August? Problem XVIII. — To find the suns amplitudet and tJie point of the compass towards which he rises or sets on a given day at any place. Rule, — Rectify the globe for the latitude of the place, and bring the sun's place in the ecliptic to the eastern semicircle of the horizon, and opposite to it, ill the respective circles, will be seen the am* plitude, and the point of the compass on which he rises : bring the sun's place to the western semi- Problems on the Terrestrial Globe. 143 oircle, and opposite to it will be seen the amplitude, and the point of the compass on which he sets. Example 1 . What is the sun's amplitude at London on the 2l8tof June? Answer, 40° to tho north of the east at rising, and 40^ north of the west at setting. 2. Required the amplitude of the sun at the following placet on the respective days mentioned : — Washington on the lOth of December. Mecca on the 20th of March, Mindanao on the 4th of July, Cape Pulmos on the 4th of August? 3. On what points of the compass does the sun rise and set on the 2bth of April at Boston ? Problem XIX. — The day of the month and the sun*s amplitude being given, to find the latitude qf tlie place, Rule, — Bring the sun's place in the ecliptic to the eastern or western side of the horizon, accord- ing to the amplitude given, and elevate or depress the pole till the sun's place coincides with the given amplitude on the horizon — then the height of the pole Mill show the latitude of the place. Example 1 . The 8un*s amplitude at rising was observed to be about 40^ south of the east on the 21st of December; re- quired the latitude of the place ? Answer. 51j° north. 2. The sun's amplitude was observed to be 25^ from the east towards the north, when his declination was 20^ north ; required the ktitude ? S. On the 21st of June the sun was observed to rise on the £. N. £. point of the horizon ; what was the latitude of the place of observation ? 4. The sun's amplitude at setting on the 1 8th of December was observed to be S. W. by S.JW. ; what was the latitude of the place of observation ? lii Problems^ ifc, by the CelesHai Globe. . Problem XX. — The time of a lunar eclipse being given y to find all those places to which it is visible. Rule. ~ Find the place to which the sun is ver- tical at the given time ; bring it to the meridian, t^m\ elevate the pole for the latitude of that place ; then the eclipse will be visible at all those places which are below the horizon. If the antipodes of the place to which the sun is vertical be brought into the zenith, the ecli()se will be visible to all the places then above th'S horizon. The antipodes may be brought into the zenith, by merely elevating the ^>pposite pole as many degrees as are equal to the ^un*s declination, and turning the globe half round on its axis. Example 1. On the 26th of January 1823, there was a total eclipse of the moon at half past five o'clock in the afternoon, London time ; where was it visible ? Answer, It was visible to nearly the whole of Europe, the entire continent of Asia, with the adjacent islands, New IIoU land, the eastern part of Africa, &c. 2. There was an eclipse of the moon on the 26tli of January 1804, at eight o'clock in the evening; where was it visible ? 3. A total eclipse of the moon happened on the 23d of July 1833, at half past three in the morning; where was it visible ? 4. To what places was an eclipse of the moon visible on the 9th of March 1830, at two o'clock In the afternoon ? PROBLEMS ON THE CELESTIAL GLOBE. Problem I. — To find the right ascension and cfe- clination of the sun or a star,* Def, — The right ascension of any celestial body IS its distance from the first point of Aries counted on the equinoctial ; and its declination is its distance from the equinoctial north or south, counted on the • The right ascensions and declinations, latitudes and longi- tudes, of Uio moon and planets, must be found in an E;)he- meris. PrMem, Sfc. hj th$ CeUitial Giobe. H5 meridian passing through the body. The right ascension is usually reckoned in time, one hour corresponding to 15 . Thus, instead of saying, right ascension 263^ 48^ it is usual to say, right ascension 17 hours 35 minutes 12 seconds. Buk' — Bring the sun's place in the ecliptic, or the given star, to that part of the brass meridian which is numbered from the equinoctial towards the poles; the degree immediately over it, on the brass meridian, is the declination ; the number of the degrees on the equinoctial, between the brass meridian and the first point of Aries, is the right ascension. ExampU 1. Required the right ascension «nd declination of the star a, Aldtharant in Taurus. Antwer, Riffht ascension 67^, declination 16® north. 3. llequired the right ascension and declination of the fol- lowing stars : — a, AUair^ in Aquila, /9, ABraeh, in Andromeda, Ot CapeUOi in Auriga, a, Achemar, in Eridanus, $t Rigdi in Orion, % Algorabt in Lyra. Problem II. — To find the latitude and longitude of a star, Def. — The longitude of any celestial body is its distance from the first point of Aries, counted on the ecliptic ; and its latitude is its distance from the ecliptic north or south, counted on a great circle passing through the body, and perpendicular to the ecliptic. The right ascensions and longitudes of celestial objects are continued eastward quite round the globe, and reckoned from 0° to 360^. Rule. — Place the upper end of the quadrant of latitude on the north or south pole of the ecliptic, as the star is north or south of that line, and bring its graduated edge to the star ; the number of de- grees between the ecliptic and the star is the lati- n ■M^ 149 Problem, die. ^ ihe CekeHai Globe. tude, and the number of degrees on the ecliptic, reckoned fVoin the first poir\t of Aries to the qua* drant, is the longitude, of the star. Exampk 1. lUquirad the ktitwle and longitude of a, Dtnebf in Cygnut. Ammtr. LsUtuda 60» north, and longitude 11* 4% or 4^ in 8. Required the Utitudee and longitudes ot the Ibllowing itan: — m, Fomalhaui, in the S. Fish, A iVffujr, in Gemini, a, Markabt in Pegasus, tk Canoptu, in Argo Navii, a, Antaret, in Scorpio, 7, BeBatriXf in Orion, Problem III« — 7%e rt^^ ascension and decUnaiion of any star, planet^ comet, SfC, being given, to find Its place on the globe. Rule. — Bring the given degree of right ascension to the meridian, then under the given declination will be found the star, &c« ExampU 1. Requiredthestar whose right ascension is 21 1**, and declination 90P north. Answer, a, Aretunut in BcioteSi 2. Required the stars whose right asoensions and decllnationi are as under : — Bight AiccnslonSi S43^ 842* 162* DeelinstlooiL 40<» S. 8<» a 26« & Sl» S. 57* N. Problem IV. — The hiUude and longitude of a star, planet, S^c. given, to find its place on the globe. Rule. — Place the division of the quadrant, marked o, on the given longitude in the ecliptic, and the upper end on the pole of the ecliptic ; then under the given latitude on the graduated edge of prMemi, Sfo, hy tht CeiesHai Giobe. 147 the quadrant will be found the itar or place of the planet, Ac* BMompit 1. Tht moon't longitude at midnight on th« 10th of FebruM7, 18S6, wm 7^ 214' 6\ and the latitude 4'' S4' 56^ | what was her plaot on the globe or in the heavens ? Aniwtr, Slie waa in the tail of the iouthem fish of the con- •teUation Piioei. 2. What lUra have the following longitudes and Uititudee : — LongltudM. LattludM. 67i* Bi llOjo 6j I47|<> i* N» 3. The longitude of Venue on the Utof July, 18S6» was 128^ and her latitude 10 4S', or !}<> N.; required her pUce on the globe. • Problem V. — 7^ lahtude of a places day of the monthf and hour being given^ to represent oy the celestial globe the face of the heavens at that time. Rule. — Elevate the pole so many degrees above the horizon as arc equal to the latitude of the place ; find the sun's place in the ecliptic, bring it to the brass meridian, and set the index to twelve ; turn the globe till the index points to the given hour, and the globe will present a view of the constella- tions corresponding with the state of the heavens at the time proposed. ExamfiU 1. Rec|uired the state of the heavens for eight o'clock in the evening at London on the Ist of November. Annotr, Lacerta is in the zenith, from which point, to the north, the meridian is oceupied by Cepheus (between the » cenith and the pole of the world), Camelopardalu% and Ursa- major ; iVom the senith to the south, P^asiis, Aquarius, and Pisces Australb are on the meridian ; Andromeda, Triangula, Aries, and Taurus, are met with from the senith to the eastern point of the horizon ; and from the zenith to the western point, we find Cygnus, Lyra, Hercules, and Ophiuehus. In the N. £. quarter of the hemisphere are Gemini, Lynx, Ca- o 2 ' lis PrMems, Sfc. Iff in§ CettMtiat OioU. ■Mloptrdalut, part of CuaiopeU, &e., betwMn tht ttnith» tfat N.( •nd N. E. ; and between the xenith, th« N. E., and E., •ra found Camiopcia, Peir*eii«t Tauriii, Auriga* the Ilyadet, tht Pleiadcti and part of Orion. Tlia 8. K. quarter contains Eridanutt part of Cetufl» Aries, Triangulum, part of Andn>. inada» &c., between the lenith, the E. and S. E. ; and the hind part of Cotui, part of Pegaiut and Aquarius, between the lenith, the S.E., and the S. The S. W. quarter is occupied 1^1 by Piscit Auttralii, part of Sagittarius, Capricornus, Equulcu% part of Pegasus, and Delphtnus, between the tcnith, the S. and S. W. ; and Sagitta, Aquila, Serpentarius, Cygnus, Lyra, Ac. between the lenith, tlio S. W., and the \V. In the N. W. quarter, we find Hercules, Corona Borealis, Draco^and part of liuotes, between the senith, the W. and N. W. ; and part of Bootes, Canes Venatici, Quadrans Muralis, the hind part of Ursa-mi^or, the tail of Draco and Ursa-minor, between tht lenith, the N. W. and N.« 8. Ilequired the state of the heavens at London on the (ol lowing dajrs, at the time specified : — January 31st, at eight in the eyening ; February S8th, at ten at night ; Noveml>€r 6th, at three in the morning. S. Required the state of the heavens at the Cape of Good Hope on the I5ht of September, at eleven o*clock at night. Problem VL — To find when any star, planet t, Sfc, will rise^ culminate, or set, at any given place. Rule. — Elevate the pole so many degrees above the horizon as are equal to the latitude of the place ; bring the 8un*s place to the ireridian, and set the * In order to become acquainted with the constellations in the heavens, it will be necessary, after performing the problem as above, to fix the globe in that position in its stand, and to remove the whole into the open air ; then to place it due north and south by a meridian line, or a marine r*s compass, making due allowance for the variation. Then, if tlie flat end of s pencil be placed on any star upon the globe, so as to point to- wards its centre, the other end will point to that particular star in the heavens. t The right ascension and declination (or latitude and lon- gitude) of a planet must be taken from an ephemeris, and its place on the globe determined by Prob. III. or IV. Probiemi, Sfc, by the Cetesiiai Globe. * 49 Index to twelve. Turn the clobo till the star or place of the planet eomcs to tlio eaati^ni verge or the horixon, and the index will show the lime of ita rifling ; bring it to the meridinn, and the index will show the time of its culminating ; continue the mo« tton of the globe till it arrives at the western edge of the horizon, and the index will, in like' manner, show the time of its setting. Oftf. When the globe it doTstod for the latitude of the given place, it will be found that, within a certain di«tanoe of the ele- vated pole, a number of atare never Mt; while a number of •tart, equally distant A'om the depres««Kl pole, never riee. The former are laid to be within the circle of ptrpttual appariHon, and the latter within the circle of perpHual ocetUiatiim, of that place. • Examptt I. Ac what time does Siriui rise, culminate, and Mt, on the 3 let of January, at London ? AniWtr, It rises about a quarter past five In the evening, culminates about a quarter before ten, and sets about a quarter pait two in the morning. 2. At what time does Proeytm rite, culminate, and set at Paris, on the ISth of September? S. On the 1st of March, 1833, the right ascension of Mars was 19 hrs. 30 min., and his declination 22° 37' S. What time did he rise, culminate, and set, at Greenwich on that day? Problem VII.«- To find how many hours any $iar is above the horizon qfany given place, or t/ie length of its diurnal arc at that place. Rule. — Elevate the pole for the latitude of the place ; bring the star to the eastern edge of the horizon, and set the index to twelve ; turn the globe t^estward till the star comes to the western edge of the horizon, and the number of hours passed over by the index is the length of the diurnal arc of that star. _ • • Example 1 . How long docs jfreturus continue above the hori« con of London ? o 3 150 Of Maps. Antwtr* About fifteen hours and three quarters. 2. How many hours do the foAowing start oontioue above the horizon of London : a Castor, in Gemini ; fi Deneh, in Leo ; /9 AUnrto, in Cyg. nus. a. How long is a Menkur, in Cetus, above the horizon of Liibon? !• 1 It i;i! M •p.:'!- i OF MAPS. 126. Latitude is the distance of a place^ in de- grees, north or south, from the equator. The latitude of places upon m^ps is expressed by the figures which run up and down the. sides. If the figures increase upward, the latitude Is north ; if they increase downward, the latitude is south. 127. Longitude is the distance of the meridian of one place, in degrees and minutes, from the me- ridian of another place ; as from the meridian of London, or Ferro, or Paris. The longitude of places upon maps is expressed by the figures which run along the top and the bottom. When the figures increase from right to Icfl, the longitude is west ; and when they increase from the left to right, the longitude is east. 128. In maps, in general, the top is northward, the bottom southward, the left hand westward, and the right hand eastward. When otherwise, the bearings of the map are expressed by a small com- pass, with a fieur-de-lis pointing to the north, and a cross pointing to the east. 129. Distances upon maps are measured by means of a scale, which is generally placed in one of the corners. 151 QUESTIONS AND EXERCISES ON THE MAP AND DESCRIPTION OF THE WORLD. 1. Between what continents is the Atlantic Ocean situated ? 2. Whether is Otaheite on the north or the south of the equator ? 3. What is the sea that lies between Europe and Africa ? 4. Whether does Europe or Asia extend farthest to the north ? 5. What is the most northerly land known ? 6. What strait separates America and Asia ? 7. What isthmus joins Africa and Asia ? 8. Between what continents does the Red Sea extend ? 9. Whether does America or Africa extend farthest south ? 10. In what direction do the Friendly IslaiAls lie from the Society Islands ? 1 1 . How does New Zealand lie from Australia ? 12. What seas are interposed between Europe and Asia ? 13. Whether is Asia or Europe the largest ? H. Into what sea does Behring's Strait lead? 15. Whether does Africa or Australia reach farthest south ? 16. What is the great ocean between America and Asia? 17. Whether is there most land in the northern or southern hemisphere ? 18. Whether is Africa or America largest ? 152 Questions and ICxerases 19. Between what continents do the Aleutian Islands lie ? 20. What isthmus connects North and South America ? 21. A ship sails from England eastward round the world, and back to England; through what oceans does it pass ? 22. What islands did Captain Parry discover in the Polar Sea ? 23. What island lies to the south of Australia? 24. A ship sails from England to Calcutta; through what seas does it pass ? 25. Which is the largest island in the world? 26. What is the most southerly group of islands known ? 27* What is the most westerly point of the Old Continent ? 28. How are the Sandwich Islands situated m regard to Otaheite ? 29. Which continent has the greatest extent of land between the tropics ? 30. Is there any continent which has no land between the tropics? 31. Which is the most southerly country of Asia? 32. Suppose a man travels the most direct road from Paris to Pekin ; through what countries does he pass ? 33. What continents do the Ural mountains se- parate ? 34. Whether is New Zealand one island or two ? 35. What is the most southerly point of Ame- rica? 36. What strait separates Australia from New Guinea? 37. What is the most southerly cape of Green- land ? on Europe. 153 98. Whether are the Ladrone Islands north or south of the equator ? 39. What ocean intervenes between Africa and India ? 40. In what direction does a vessel sail from England to the West Indies ? 41. Whether is Sumatra or St. Domingo the largest island ? 42. Suppose a man travels from Madrid to Cal- cutta by land (but crossing the Dardanelles); through what countries does he pass ? 43. How are the Ladrone Islands situated in regard to China ? 44. When it is noon at London^ what hour is it at New York ? 45. Through wtiat countries does a man pass in travelling from Constantinople to Morocco ? 46. What strait leads into Baffin's Bay ? 47. Does the equator cross any part of North A^merica ? 48. Suppose a man travels by land from Quebec to Valparaiso; through what countries does he pass ? 49. How are the Caroline and Ladrone Islands situated in regard to each other? 50. How many degrees is the Cape of Good Hope south from London ? 51. How many degrees is Ispahan east from Paris? ON THE MAP AMD DESCRIPTION OF EUROPE. 52. What are the northern boundaries of Eu- rope? 53. Whether is London or Paris farthest to the west? 54. Through what countries does the Danube flow ? Ihto what sea does it fall ? 154 Questions and Bxerciset m K , 55. By what seas and straits in £urope bounded on the east ? 56* What is the most westerly point of Europe ? 57. What is the largest country in Europe ? 58. What is the sea between Britain and Den- mark? 59. On what river does Hamburgh stand ? Through what provinces does it pass ? Into what 8ca does it fall ? 60. What is the greatest inland sea of Europe ? 61. What is the highest mountain in Europe ? 62. What are the straits between Italy and Si- cily? 63. In what country s modern Rome situated ? 64. On what river is Oporto situated ? 65. What sea separates France from England ? 66. What is the principal sea-port of Austria? On what sea is it situated ? 67* To whom does Genoa now belong ? 68. What is the chief sea-port of trade in Bel- gium? 69. Of what kingdom is Amsterdam the capital ? 70. What Is the principal river of Italy ? and into what sea does it fall ? 71* A vessel sails from Portsmouth to Arch* angel ; through what seas does it pass ? 72. What are the chief French ports on the Mediterranean ? 73. What is comprehended in the new state of Greece ? 74. To what power does Malta belong ? 75. What are the chief volcanoes in Italy ? 76. Through what country does Haemus, or the Balkan chain, extend ? 77. Whether is Berlin or Vienna the most east- erly? 78. A vessel sails from London to Odessa; on Europe, 155 through what seas does it pass? Through what •traits ? 79. Whether is Stockholm or Petersburgh the most northerly ? 80. To what state does Mentz now belong ? 81. What countries do the Pyrenees separate? 82. What great city lies at the mouth of the Tagus ? 83. A man travels from Paris to Petersburgh ; through what countries does he pass ? 84. Of what empire is Vienna the capital ? 85. Through what countries does the Rhine How? 86. What are the chief natural features of Swit- zerland ? 87. What chain of mountains runs through Italy? 88. What are the chief ports on the west coast of France ? 89. What is the greatest city of Prussia ? 90. On what river does it stand ? 91. A vessel sails from Dublin to Petersburgh; through what seas does it pass ? 92. What are the ports of Russia on the Black Sea? 93. What are the gulfs branching off from the Baltic ? 94. What is the chief manufacturing city of France ? 95. To whom does Parma now belong ? 96. What is the chief commercial city of Italy ? 97. What town is to be the capital of Greece ? 98. A man travels by the most direct road from Rotterdam to Naples ; through the dominions of wJiat powers does he pass ? 99 What is the greatest river rolling through Russia? and into what sea does it fall ? 100. What fortress does Britain possess in Spain ? 156 i i QuesHons and Exercises 101. Where arc the Seven Islands ? 102. What countries compose the kingdom of Sardinia ? 103. What great cities are on the Seine besides Paris? 104. Between what countries do the Carpathian mountains extend ? 105. When it is noon at London, what hour is it at Stockholm ? 106. When it is midnight at Petersburgh» witat hour is it at Madrid ? 107. To what power does the island of Candia belong ? 108. Wliat are the chief towns of Sicily? a I ON THE MAP AND DESCRIPTION OF ASIA. 109. What seas bound Asia on the south ? 110. To whom do Syria and Palestine now be- long? 111. What is the capital of British India? 112. Near what city are the ruins of Babylon ? 113. Between what countries does the Persian gulf extend ? 114. What is the only sea-port in China where Europeans arc allowed to trade ? 115. Through what country does the Oxus flow? and into what lake does it fall ? 116. What are the chief states of Chinese Tar* tary ? 117. Whether is Ispahan or Pekin the most northerly ? 118. In what part of Arabia was the Wahabi power chiefly established ? 119. What sUtes are subject to Cochin-China ? 120. To whom does most of the Oriental Ar- chipelago belong ? an Ana, 157 121. What are the three presidencies of British India ? 122. What is the government of eastern Siberia? 123. Which is the most easterly empire in Asia? 124. What is the situation of Sincapore? 125. To whom does Arracan now belong? 126. Who holds now the chief independent power in liindoostan ? and where is his capital ? 127. What is the chief commercial city on the Persian gulf? 12S. Where is the residence of the Grand Lama? and in what country ? 129. Which are the highest mountains in Asia? 1 30. Which are the principal rivers in China ? 131. To what power do the Philippine Islands belong ? 132. What straits separate Sumatra from Java? 133. To what power do Georgia and Circassia now belong ? 134. What countries are separated by the Altai mountains ? 1 35. What are the chief inland seas of Asia ? 136. Where is the chief seat of Mahomedan pil- grimage ? 1 37. Into what two parts is the southern coast of India divided ? 138. To whom do Agra and Delhi now belong? 1 39. When it is noon at Nankin, what hour is it at Constantinople ? HO. What is the capital of the Birman empire ? ]4i. What power holds most of the mountain territory in India? 142. What is the chief city of Palestine? 143. What are the chief cities of Syria? J 44. Whether is Java or Amboyna farthest east? 1 45. Which is the chief commercial city in Asia Mmor? 158 Questions and Exercises 146. How many degrees is Calcutta cast of Con. itantinople ? 147. When it is midnight at Calcutta, what hour Is it at Bombay ? 148. What is the most southern cape of India ? 149. How many degrees is Irkoutsk north of Calcutta ? 150. Near what modem city are the remains of Nineveh ? 151. What are the principal rivers of Hindoostan Proper ? 152. What independent state is situated at the mouth of the Indus ? 153. In what territory is Seringapatam ? 154. What is the only port of Japan which the Dutch are allowed to enter ? 155. What is the present capital of Siam ? 156. Where are pearls found in the Persian Gulf? 157. What is the chief seat of learning in India? 158. To what power does Malacca now belong ? ON THE MAP AND DESCRIPTION OF AFRICA. 159. What is the chief British settlement on thd western coast of Africa? 160. Into what sea does the Niger fall? 161. Does it fall by one or by many mouths ? 162. What countries have been conquered by the Pacha of Egypt ? 163. On what part of the continent are the Atlas mountains ? 164. What people live to the north of the Cape territory ? 165. What are the chief settlemente of the Por- tuguese on the eastern coast ? 166. What is the chief island on the Niger? 167. What sort of countiy is I.oggun? wi Ui€ Map of Africa. 159 168. What are the chief cities on the Delta of the Niger? 169. What river flows through Nubia? 170. For what is the coast of Berbera remarkable? 171* What tribe possesses the capital of Abys- sinia? 172. Dehind what coast is the kingdom of Ashan- tee? 173. Wliere b the American settlement of Li- beria? 174. Which is the most westerly point of Africa? 175. What is the most remarkable mountain in the Canary Islands ? 176. At the mouth of what river is Quillimane ? 177. By what people has Melinda been destroyed? 178. To what power does Mauritius now be- long ? 179. For what is St. Helena remarkable ? 180. W^here is the country of the CafTres? 181. By what European nation has Algiers been conquered ? 18^. What barbarous people have overrun great part of Abyssinia ? 183. What countnr does Lake Tchad bound? 184*. For what is Timbuctoo remarkable ? ] 85. What is the capital of Bambarra ? 186. On what river upon the western coast have the French their chief settlements ? 187. What is the principal production of Ma* deira? 188. What are the chief Portuguese settlements on the western coast ? 189. Where are the most remarkable ruins in Egypt ? 190. What are the principal states of Iloussa? p 2 160 Questiani and Extrctses ON THE MAP AND DP.SCRIPTION OF NORTH AMERICA. 191. What is the most commercial city in the United States ? 192. How has Upper Canada been peopled ? 193. Into what sea does the Maclcenzie River fall? ] 94*. On what coast is Boothia situated ? 195. What is the greatest range of mountains in North A merica ? 196. What is the greatest waterfall in North America ? and where situated ? 197. What constitutes the chief wealth of Mexico? 198. What is the greatest river in North America? 199. Where is the seat of government of the United States ? 200. Where is the Canada fur trade carried on ? 201. Which is the largest of the American lakrs? 202. What arc the two principal towns of Upper Canada ? and on what lake situated ? 203. At the mouth of what river is New Orleans situated ? 204 r Of what West India island have the Negroes obtained possession ? 205. What is the chief town In North Carolina? 206. What is the capital of Massachusetts ? 207* For what is Newfoundland remarkable ? 208. Which is the largest West India island ? and to what power does it belong ? 209. In what gulf is Prince Edward Island si- tuated ? 210. What are the chief towns in New Brunswick? 21 1. What people inhabit the most northern coast of America ? 212. What are the chief French islands in the West Indies ? on i/w Map of South America. 161 213. Into what sea docs tho Columbia fall? 214. Which is the largest and richest of the British West India islands ? 215. What was the island Arst discovered by Columbus ? 216. What are the chief towns of Mexico ? 217. What is the chief city of New England ? 218. What is the principal canal in the United States ? and what river and lake does it join ? 219. On what river is Quebec situated? 220. What is the chief city in Pennsylvania ? 221. What is the new state immediately south of Mexico ? 222. Which is the chief town in Kentucky ? 223« On what ocean is California situated ? ON THE MAP AND DESCRIPTION OV SOUTH AMERICA. 224. Which is the principal river in South America? 225. Whether are the Andes nearest to the eastern or western coast ? 226. By what straits is Terra del Fuego separated from the continent ? 227* What are the principal sea-ports in Chili ? 228. Where are the chief silver mines in Peru ? 229. Which is the highest of the Andes ? 230. Which is the most remarkable volcano in South America? 231. What is the capital of La Plata? 232. What mines does Brazil contain ? 233. Does Spain possess now any territory in South America? 234. What form of government have her former colonies adopted ? 235. What settlements does Britain possew in Guiana ? p 3 169 Questions and Extreisss 2S6. WImt is the capital of Pom? and what lis •ea-p4)rt ? 237. What grrnt river rolls through Ouiana? 238. What is the name of the most southern part of America ? what is reported of its inhabitants ? 239. What is the capital of Hrazil ? 240. What settlement have the French in Guiana? 24'1. Into what three states has Colombia beru lately divided ? 242. What are the principal sea-ports of Co- lombia ? 243. How is Paraguay governed ? 244. What name has been lately given to Upper Peru? 245. When it is noon at Rio Janeiro, what hour is it at Lima ? 246. What is the difference of latitude between Caraccas and Buenos Ayres ? 247. Into what states is Colombia now divided ? 248. How is Brazil now governed ? 249* How many degrees does South America extend north of the equator ? 250. Suppose a vessel to sail round South Ame- rica, from Carthagena to Panama, what seas would it pass through ? 251. What are the chief ports of Brazil ? ON THE MAP AND DESCRIPTION OF THE BRITISH ISLANDS. 252. On what river is London situated ? 253. How many degrees is Edinburgh more northerly than London ? 254. Which is the most westerly point of Eng- land? 255. A vessel sails from London to Belfast; through what seas and straits does she pass ? on tht Map of the BriHth hlandn. 163 %86, Which is tho Ur^^c « lake in Scotland? 2.'>7. What hilli extend along the borders of England and Scotland ? ' 258. What is tho chief )(>at of the cotton manu- focture in England ? 259. On what frith is Fvhat tlie south ? 42. What is the zenith ? 43. What is the nadir ? 44. What is the horizon ? 45. What is the sensible horizon ? 46. What is the rational iiorizon ? 47. How is the rational horizon represented ? 48. Deseribe the eireles, and their divisions, that are commonly drawn on the wooden horizon ? 49. What is the latitude of a place ? 50. What is the longitude of a place ? 51. What is the latitude of a celestial body ? 52. What is the longitude of a celestial body ? 53. Which are the equinoctial points ? 54. Which are the solstitial points ? HEIGHTS OF MOUNTAINa English Feet above level of inn. Dwahalagiri, highest of the Himalayah 28500 Sorata, highest of the Andes 25600 Chimborazo, S. America 21800 Volcano of Cotopaxi, ib 19500 Elbrux, highest of Caucasus 18*^00 Mount St. Elias, N. America 18100 Volcano of Popocatepec, Mexico.... 18020 Mount Ararat, Turkey in Asia 17500 Mountain of Potosi, S. America 16S00 Mont BlanCf highest mountain in Europe 15680 Mountains of Geesh, Africa 15O50 JFeiyhta of Mountains, 173 Unullah I'pvt •bovi* luvol otBva, Ti'ak of TeneriflTe \2'2:iQ Ilight'it Peak of Atliw chain, Africa 11980 James P«9ak, highest of Rocky Mountains 1 1700 Mont Perdu, highest summit of Pyrenees 1 1283 Ktna, Sicily 109G.3 Mount Lebanon, Turkey in Asia 9520 (Mty of Quito, S. America D'ASG St. Gothard, Switierland 9075 Peak of Lomniti, highest summit of Carpathians 8640 Highest of the Do&ines, Norway 8500 Hospice of Great St. Bernard, the highest inhabited ground in Europe 8040 Highest Peak of Blue Mountains, Jamaica 7500 Chuin of Olympus, Turkey in Europe 6500 Mount Wasliington, highest of the Alloghanics 6500 Chain of Mount Ida, Turkey in Asia 4960 Hecla, Iceland 4900 Vesuvius, Iu>y 390C) Table Mountain, Cape of Good Hope 3582 Mount Athos, Turkey in Europe 3353 VUe Ghuuto, Ilindoostan 3000 MOUNTAINS IN BllITAIN AND IRELAND. Ben Nevis, the highest mountain in Britain 4340 Cairngorum, Iny^rness-shire 40.'>0 Ben Lawers, Perthshire 4051 Ben More, Pertlishire 3903 Schehallien, Perthshire 3564 Snowdon, CaernarvonMhirc • 3568 Cader Idris, Merionethshire 3550 Macgillicuddy's Reeks, highest mountain in Ireland ... 3404 Crossfell, Cumberland 8390 Ben Lomond, Stirlingshire 3262 Goat-field, Arran 2945 T.ogan house, highest of Pentlonds 1700 Highest inhabited ground in Britain, at LeadhiUs 1564 Arthur's seat, Edinburgh 810 *^* The highest of the European mountains, 15,000 and 14,000 feet ; of the Asiatic, 29,000 and 28,000 ; of the Afri- can, 13,000 and 12,000; and of the American, 25,000 and 24,000. Q 3 17* LcUUudea and Longitudes LATITUDES AND LONGITUDES OF REMARKABLE PLACES, T%» Longitudei from the Meridian of Greenwich, LtUiiude. Aberdeen 57^ 9' N. Abo, Finland 60 27 N. Aleppo 36 11 N. Alexandria, Egypt 31 13 N. Algiers 36 49 N. Algoa Bay, Africa 34 . 1 S. Amsterdam 52 i22 N. Antwerp 51 13 N. Archangel 64 34 N. Astracan 46 21 N. Athens 37 58 N. Babclmandeb Cape 12 40 N. Bahama 26 43 N. Baltimore 39 21 N. Bmrbadoes 13 5 N. Bassora or Basra 30 30 N. BaUvia 6 9 8. Beachy Head 50 44 N. Berlin 52 32 N. Bermudas Isles 32 22 N. Bombay 18 54 N. Bordeaux 44 50 N. Boston, America 42 22 N. Breslau 51 6 N. Brest 48 23 N. Brighton 50 50 N. Bristol 51 27 N. Brussels 50 51 N. Bucnos«Ayres 34 37 S. Cairo SO 2 N. Cadiz 36 32 N. CaUis 50 57 N. CalcutU 22 34 N. Cambridge 52 13 N. Longitude, r 6' VV. 22 18 E. 37 10 E. 29 55 K. 3 5 F. 25 40 E. 4 53 E. 4 24 E. 40 43 E. 48 3 E. 23 46 E. 43 31 E. 78 56 W. 77 48 W. 59 41 W. 47 33 E. 106 52 E. 15 E. 13 22 E. 64 30 W. 72 56 E. 34 W 70 59 w. 17 2 E. 4 29 W. 8 W. 2 35 W. 4 22 E. 58 24 W. 31 19 E. 6 17 W. 1 51 E. 88 26 E. O^E. of Remarkable Places* Latitwh. Ctniry SS^'lcyN. Canton 23 8 N. Capo Augustine ,, . 8 23 S. Cape Blanco 20 47 N. Cape Carmel 82 51 N. Cape Clear ... 51 25 N. Cape Comorin 8 5 N. Cape Farewell 59 42 N. Cape Horn 55 58 S. Cape of Good Hope 33 29 S. Caraccas 10 31 N. Carthagena, South Amcricp 10 25 N. Charlestown 32 43 N. Cheltenham 51 54 N. Constantinople 41 1 N. Copenhagen 55 41 N. Corinth 37 53 N. Cork (Cove) 51 52 N. Cracow 50 4 N. Dantzio 54 21 N. Delhi 28 37 N. Dover 51 8 N. Dublin 53 23 N. Edinburgh 55 57 N. Ferro, Canary Isles 27 45 N. Finisterre, Cape 42 54 N. Florence 43 47 N. Forelandi North 51 22 N. Geneva 46 12 N. Genoa 44 25 N. Gibraltar 36 7 N. Glasgow 55 52 N. Goa 15 SO N. Gottingen • 51 32 N. Greenwich 51 29 N. Hague 52 3 N. Hakluyt's Head 79 45 N. Halifax, Nova Scotia 44 44 N. Hamburg 53 33 N. Havanna 23 9 N. Helena, St 15 55 S. Jena „. 50 56 N. Jerusalem 31 48 N. 175 Longitudt. 15°3i'W. 113 3 E. 34 66 W. 17 3 W, 35 £. 9 29 W. 77 44 E. 45 16 W. 18 23 E. 67 21 W. 67 5 W. 75 30 W. 79 52 W. 2 4 W. 28 55 £. 12 35 £. 23 28 E. 8 7 W. 19 57 E. 18 38 E. 77 40 E. 1 19 £. 6 20 W. 3 11 W. 18 W. 9 16 W. 11 16 E. 1 27 £. 6 10 E. 8 58 E. 5 22 W. 4 16 W. 73 53 E. 9 56 E. 0* 4 19 E. 9 15 £. 63 36 W. 9 59 E. 82 24 W. 5 43 W 11 37 £. 35 20 E. J 7b Latitude* and lA)ngitude* Latitude, IrkouUk 5/ 17' N. iNpalinn 32 'i.*! N. Land's End, England 50 4 N. Leghorn 43 33 N. Li'iptio 51 20 N. Liege, or Luik 50 39 N. Lium V2 3 S. Lisl)on 38 A*2 N. Liverpool 53 224 N. Lizard Point 49 58 N. London (St Paula) 51 31 N. Lyons 45 AG N. Madraa 13 4 N. Madrid 40 25 N. Malacca, citj 2 12 N. MalU 35 53 N. Manchester 53 29 N. Manilla 14 36 N. Marseilles 43 IR N. Mauritius 20 10 S. Mexico 19 26 N. Milan 45 28 S. Mississippi, mouth of 29 6 N. Montreal 45 31 N. Morocco 31 37 N. Mo«M>w 55 46 N. Kankin 32 5 N. Naples 40 50 N. Newcastle 55 2 N. New Orleani 29 58 N. New York 40 41 N. North Cape 71 10 N. Norwich 52 37 N. Odessa 46 29 N. Oporto 41 9 N. Orkney Islands, N.E. end 59 22 N. Otaheite 17 29 S. Oxford 51 46 N. Paris 48 50 N. Pekin 39 54 N. Petersburg, St 59 5G N. Philadelphia 39 57 N. Phillips's Island 16 24 S. T.onfjUu(1§» UYV' 11' K. 51 50 K. 5 41 w. 10 16 E. 12 22 E. 5 31 E. 76 55 w. 9 8 >v. 2 58 w. 5 11 W. 5j w. 4 49 E. 80 22 K. 3 42 W. 102 15 E. 14 31 E. 2 14 w. 120 58 E. 5 22 v.. 57 29 E. 99 5 W. 9 11 E. 89 8 ^^^ 73 35 w. 7 36 w. 37 33 E. 118 47 E. 14 16 E. 1 31 w. 90 8 w. 74 5 >v. 26 1 E. 1 14 E. 30 43 E. 8 37 AV. 2 22 W. 149 30 W 1 15 W 2 20 E. 116 28 E. 30 19 E. 75 11 W 143 57 W * province and great city of northern Hindooftaii* Vocabulary of Proper "Names, 179 Aix-la-Chapelle (pron. Ai-lah-sha-pe'l) j a city of Prussia, famous for its baths. Aj-mere ; a large province and ancient city in Hindoostan. Al-ba'-ni-a ; a province of European Turkey. Al-ba-ny ; a city in the State of New York. Al-ca'n*tara; a town in Estromadura. Al-der-ney ; a British Island in the English Channel. A-len-te'-jo ; a province of Portugal. Al'-go-a ; a bay east of the Cape of Good Hope, near which IS a British colony. A-Ie-o'u-tian isles ; a range in the northern Pacific, between Asia and North America. A-le'p-po ; a great trading city, the capital of Syria. Al-es-sa'n-dri-a; a strong town of Piedmont, in Italy. Al-ex-a'n-dri-a ; the chief port and ancient capital of Egypt. Al-ge-si'-ra ; a district of Asiatic Turkey, between the Eu- phrates and Tigris. Al-ge-zi^-ras ; a town of Spain, near Gibraltar. Al-gi'-era (pron. Al-ge'-ers) ; a country and sea-port of Bar- bary, now subject to France. Ar-i-cant ; a large sea-port of Spain, on the east coast. Al-Ia'-ha-bad ; a province and large city of British India. Al-me'i-da ; a strong fortress in Portugal. Alps; the highest range of mountains in Europe, dividing France from Italy, &c. Al-sa'ce ; a former province of France on the east. Al-tai ; a great range of mountains in Siberia, very rich in mines. Alt'-dorf ; a handsome town in Switzerland. Am -a-zon, properly Ma-ra-non ; a river of South America, supposed to be the largest in the world. Am-bo'y-na ; one of the Molucca islands. A-me'r-i-ca ; an extensive continent discovered more than threo hundred years ago, is divided into North and South. Am'-herst town; lately founded by Britain in the Bay of Bengal. A'-mi-ens; a famous city in the north of France. A'-mour; a great river of eastern Tartary. Am'-ster-da'm ; the capital of the kingdom of Holland, and one of the greatest seats of commerce in Europe. An-co'-na; a considerable town and district in Roman Italy. An-da-lu'-si-a ; a fine province in the south of Spain. An'-da-mans; a range of islands in the Bay of Bengal. 180 Vocabulary of Proper Names, A'ii-(Ic8 ; the Cor-dil-lc'-ras, or chain of the Andes, « greal and very lofly diAin of mountains in South America. An'-dros; an island in the Archipelago. An'-gers ; a city in the department of Maine and Loire. An -glo-sey ; the north-west county of North Wales. An-go^-la; a country of western Africa. An-go'-ra (pron. An-gou'-ra) ; a city of Natolia> in Turkey. An-jou' ; a former province in the north-west of France. An-na'p-o-IIs ; the seat of government in Maryland. An-ne'-cy ; a town of Savoy, in the kingdom of Sardinia. Ans-pa ch ; a city of Germany, now in Bavaria. An-ti'Mas; the West Indian Islands: the Greater Antillas are Cuba, St. Domingo, Jamaica, and Porto- Rico; the Lesser Antillas are those commonly called the Caribbee Islands, or Windward and Leeward Islands. An'-tl-och ; the ancient metropolis of Syria, now decayed. An-ti-pa -ros ; a small island in the Grecian Archipelago. An -trim ; a county in the north-east of Ireland. Ant'>werp ; a large and celebrated sea-port of Belgium. An-zi-co'; a country of western Africa. Ap-en-nines ; a chain of mountains running through Italy. A-ra-bi-a ; a large country in the south-west of Asia. Ar'-a-can ; a country west of Ava, belonging to Britain. A'-ral ; a lake c^ Asia, to the east of the Caspian Sea. A'-ra-rat; a celebrated and lofty mountain of Armenia. Ar-be'-la; an ancient city of Kurdistan, in Asiatic Turkey. Ar-ca'*di-a ; a province of the ancient Pel(^onnesus. Arch-a'n-gel ; a considerable city in the north of Russia. Ar-chi-pe'l-a-go (pron. Ar-ke-pel-a-go) and ^-ge-an Sea; t!ie islanck and sea between Greece and Asia-minor. Arc-tic High-lands ; a territory in the north of BafBn^s Bay. Ar-de'nnes ; a forest of Luxemburg and the Netherlands. Ar-ka'n-sas ; a large river and territory in North America. Aries (pron. Arl) ; a large town in the south of France. Ar-me^-ni-a; a large cotmtry divided between Persia and Turkey. Ar'-ra-gon; a very extensive province in Spain. As-ca-lo'n ; a town of Palestine. Ash-a'n-tee (pron. Ash-aa'n-te') ; a considerable kingdom of western Africa. A'-si-a; a great continent east of Europe and Africa, and more extensive and fertile than either. A'-sov, or A'-zoph; a town in southern Rustia» on the Don. Vocahulary of Proptsr Names. 181 As-phul-ti'-tcs, or the Dead Sea ; a lake in Palestine. As-syr-i-a ; an ancient kingdom of Asia, no«ir Kurdistan, &e. As-tra-ca'n ; a great city of Asiatic Russia. As-tu'-ri-as; a northern province of Spain. A'-thcns ; a celebrated city of ancient Greece, slUl the capital, and with remains of edifices. A'-thos ; a liigh mountain of northern Greece. At^as; a chain of lofly mountains in northern Africa. A'-va ; the name of the principal kingdom of the Birman empire, also of its capital. Au'ck-land Isles ; a group to the south of New Zealand, dis- covered by Captain Abraham Bristow, in 1806. A-ve'r-no ; a remarkable lake near Naples, in Italy. Au'gs-burg (pron. Os-burg) ; a fine city of Bavaria. Av'-ig-non (pron. Av'-i-non) ; a city in the south of France. Av-ra'nches (pron. Av-ra'nsh) ; a town i.« the N. W. of France. AuVtral-ia, or New Holland ; ^he largest island in the worldi now colonized by Britain. Au-run-ga.baM ; a cii . 'n the Deccan of India. Au'-ster-litz (pron. ' r-litz) a small town of Moravia, where Napoleon ga ^ .,J a famous victory. Aus-tri-a (Os-tre-&); a province of Germany, which gives name to the present empire. Au-veVgne (pron. 0-veme); a former province of France. Ai'-a^mor ; a small seaport in Morocco. A-zo'res; islands in the Atlantic Ocean, belonging to Por- tugal. A'xum ; an ancient and fine city of Abyssinia. Bft-bel-man'-deb ; a famous strait at the mouth of the Red Sea. Ba'-by-lon ; a celebrated ancient capital, now in ruins. BaVtri-a ; an ancient kingdom of Asia, now Balk. Ba-da-jVs ; a very strong town of Spain, much contested m the late war. Ba-da-gry ; a large town of western Africa. Ba'-den ; a grand duchy on the right or eastern bank of the Rhine. Ba-dri-nath ; a famous shrine in India, near the source of the Ganges. Baf-fin's Bay ; a large gulf between Greenland and North America. Bag-dad (pron. Bag-dat); a celebrated city of Asiatic Turkey, on the river Tigris. ♦ Ba-har ; a province of Hindostan. west of Bengal. 182 VoeeUmlafy of Proper Names. B»-hi-a, or St Sal-va-dor ; a great seaport in Braiil. Bah-rein ; an idand in the Pcraian Gulf, where there is a great pearl fishery. Ba 1-bcc (pron. Bolbeck) ; the aneient Heliopolis, in Syria, now in ruins. Ba'Uly ; an island near Java, in the East Indies. Ba'1-ti-roore (pron. Bol-te-more) ; the capital of Maryland, in North America. Bam-ba'r-ra ; a large and fertile country of central Africa, along the Niger. Ban-ca ; an island near Sumatra, very rich in tin. Baiv-cook ; the present capital of Siam, on the Mcinam. Ba'n«da ; the chief ef the islands producing nutmeg. Ba'n-ga-lore ; a large and strong town of Mysore in India. Ban-tarn ; a town and district of Java. Bar-ba'-does ; a rich British island in tha West Indies. Ba'r-ba-ry; the northern part of Africa, from Morocco to Tripoli. Ba'r-ca ; a Uarren territory between Tripoli and £g>'pt. Bar-ce-lo'na ; a great trading city of Catalonia in Spain. Ba^..sle ; a protcstant canton and city of Switzerland. Bas-so-ra (pron. BaiZ-re) ; a principal seaport of Turkey, uit the river Euphrates. Ba's-ti-a ; the capital of Corsica. Ba-ta'-vi-a, in Java ; capital of the Dutch Indian settlements. Bath ; a tine city, and the most frequented watering-place in England. Ba-va-ri-a; a large kingdom in Germany. Ba-yo^nne ; a flourishing seaport in the south of France. Beg-herme ; a warlike, but barbarous state of central Africa. Beh-ring^s Strait separates Asia from America in the nortli. Be -i-ra ; a province of Portugal. BeUfa'st ; a large commercial town in the north of Irclanu. Be'Ugi-um ; a recent kingdom formed of the southern Nether lands. BeUgra'de ; a celebrated and strong town of Servia, in Turiccy. Be-il-go-rod, or A-ker-man ; a town of Bessarabia. Be-loo'-chi-sta'n ; an extensive country of eastern Persia. Be-na'res ; a very ancient and populous city of British 1 ndia. Ben-coo'-len ; a town in Sumatra, ceded by Britain to Holland. Be'nder ; a town of Bessarabia, now belonging to Russia. Be-ne-ve'n-to ; a city of Naples, belonging to the Pope. Bengal ; a large province of Hindostan, watered by the Ganges. VocaOulary of Proper Names, 183 Ue'-nin ; a country and large town of western AfrioOi on a branch of the Niger. Bc-rc'-zi-na ; a river of Russian Lithuania. Be^-gen ; a seaport town of Norway. BeV-gen ; the Dutcl . name of the town of Mons. BeV-gen-op-BOom ; a strong town of North Brabant. Ber-l'in ; a fine city, the capital of Prussia. Ber-mu'-das ; British islands near the American coast. Berne ; the chief canton and city of Switzerland. Bes-sa'-ra-bi-a ; a province of Russia, conquered from Turkey. Be'th.le-hcm (pron. Be'th-lem); a village of Palestine, fa- mous as the place of our Saviour's nativity. Bil-bo'-a ; the capital of Biscay, in Spain. Bil-dul-ge-ri'd (properly Bled-el-je-rede) ; a territory of northern Africa, abounding in dates. Bir (pron. Beer) ; a town of Diarbekr, on the Euphrates. Birmingham ; a very large town of England, the chief seat of the hardware ma nu&cture. Bi's-cay ( Bis-key) ; a province in the north of Spain. Bls-na-gaV ; % city of southern Ilindostan Bi-thy'n-i-a ; an ancient province in the north of Asia Minor. Blanc, Mont ; the highest mountain of Europe, in Savoy. Ble^-hcim (pron. Blen-hcm); a village in Bavaria, cele- brated for a victory gained there by the British in 1704. Blois ; an ancient and famous city of France, on the Loire. Boe'-ton ; an island of the Oriental Archipelago. Bo-go'-ta, Santa Fe de ; the capital of Colombia. Bo-he'-mi-a; a German kingdom, part of the Austrian em- pire. Bois-le-Duc ; a town in Dutch Brabant. Bo-ja-doV (pron. Bo-ya-dor) ; a cape on the west of Africa. Bo'k-ha-ra ; a large country and city of Independe t Tartary. Bo-lo'g-na (pron. Bo-lo-nya) ; a duchy in R«man Italy. Bu'l-ton ; a great manufacturing town, in Lancashire. Bom-ba'y ; a British city and presidency in Hindostan. Bonny ; a large seaport in Africa, at the mouth of the Niger. Bunou;^a kingdom in the interior of Africa. 181. Vocabulary of Proper Names. Bo-ro-di'-no ; a village In Russiai where a great battle was fought by Napoleon. Du^s-ni-a ; a province of European Turkey. Bovton ; tlie capital of the State of Massachusets, in North A merica. Bo'th-ni.a » a subdivision of western Finland. Bo-vines (pron. Bo'Ve'ne) ; a town in the soutlicrn Nether. lands, where a great battle was fought. Bo'u-logne (pron. Boo-lo'yne); a seaport in the north of France. Bo'ur-bon ; an island in the Indian Sea, belonging to France. Bo'us-sa ; a country and city on the Niger, where Mongo Puik was killed. Bou-ta'n ; a country in the north of Hindostan. Bra-ba'nt, North ; a province of the kingdom of Ilollnnd. Bra-lm'nt, South ; a province of Belgium, containing the capital. Bra-ga'n-za ; a considerable town in the north of Portugal. Bran-den-burg ; a province of Prussia. Brass ; a port of western Africa, at the mouth of the Niger. Braz-i'l ; a vast country in South America, once belonging to Portugal, but now separated from it. Bre'-da ; a large and strong town, capital of Dutch Brabant. Bre'-men ; a duchy in the kingdom of Hanover ; also an in. dependent commercial city. Bre's-lau ; a duchy and large city of Silesia, in Prussia. Brest ; the chief naval arsenal in the west of France. Bre'-tagne (pron. Bri't-ta*ny) ; a former province of France, on the west. Bre'-ton, Cape ; an island in the Gulf of St Lawrence. Bright-helm-stone (now written and pron. Bri'ghton); a fa. mous sea-bathing place in Sussex. Bri's-tol ; a great commercial city in the west of England. Bri't-ain ; a general name given to the largest of the British Islands, including England, Wales, and Scotland. Bruges (pron. Briige) ; a city of the Netherlands. Bruns-wick ; a duchy and city in the north of Germany. Bru's-sels ; the capital city of Belgium. Bu'da ; the capital of Hungary. Bu'-en-os Ayres ; the capitol of La Plata, in South America. Bu1-ga-ria ; a large province of Turkey, south of the Danube; Bu'rgun^dy; a district of France, famous for its wines. By-za'n-tium ; an ancient city, now Constantinople. Caen (pron. Cann) ; an ancient town f]lf Normandy. Vocabulary of Proper Natnes. 1 S5 Ca-bul (pron. Cau-bul) ; a kingdom of eastern Persia, bor- dering on HindoftUn. Ca'-dii ; the greatest commercial town of Spain, on the south . west. Caf-fra'ri-a ; a country of southern Africa, east of the colony of Good Hope. Cag-li-a'-ri ; the chief city in the island of Sardinia. Cai-ro ; the modern capital of Egypt. Cul-a-bar, Old and New ; ports in Africa, on branches of the Niger.^ Ca-la'-bria ; the southern province of Naples. Ca'-lais ; a seaport of France, where English travellers usually land. Cal'Cu't-ta ; the capital of the English empire in India. ' Ca.le-do^.ni-a, New ; a large island in the South Sea. Cali-cut; a kingdom in the S.W. of Hindostan. Cal-i-fu'r-ni-a ; a peninsula of Spanish North America. Cal-la'-o ; the port of Lima, in Peru. CaUmar ; a seaport town of Sweden, or. the Baltic. Ca'1-va-ry ; the mountain of crucifixion, in Jerusalem* Cam-ba'y ; a fine town in the N.W. of Hindostan. Cam-bo'-cli-a ; a kingdom of Asia, subject to Cochin-China. Cam-bra'y ; a large and celebrated city of !• rench Flanders. Cam-bridge ; a town and university in England. Cani-ptig-na di Ro-ma; the territory round Rome. Cam-pe^-chy ; a bay and territory in New Spain. Ca'n-a-da ; a large country in British North America. Ca-na-ra ; a district on the coast of Malabar. Can-da'-har ; a province and city of CabuL CVn-ter-bury ; an ancient city of Englandi with a fine ca- thedral. Ca'n-ton ; the chief commercial city in China. Cape- Town ; the town of the Cape of Good Hope. Cape Verde Islands ; a group on the eastern side of the At- lantic Ocean, belonging to Portugal. Ca-ra c-cas ; a country and large city of South America. Ca-ra-ina'-ni-a ; a province in the south of Asia Minor. Ca'r-licle ; 'an ancient and considerable city in the north of England. Ca'r-lo-stad (pron. Ca'rl-stat); the capital of Austrian Croatii. Ca'rls-ru-he ; the seat of government in the Grand Duchy of Baden. Car-ma -ni-a ; a province of Persia, now Kcrman. Car-ni-o'-la ; a province of the yVustrian empire. 11 3 V « ,V\ 186 Voeabukuy of Proper Names. (^.•i-ro-ir.na. North and South ; two States In North America, v'ui-pa'-thi-an Mouiitaini; a chain dividing Hungary from I'uland. Car-tha-ge'-na ; a large and ancient waport in Spain; also another in Colombia. Ca'th-gar ; the capital of Cliineie Tartary. Cash-mere ; a country and city in Indiat now subject to th« sheiks. Ca's-pi-an ; a great inland sea in the west of Asia. Cas-ti1e (pron. Cas-te'lc), Old and New ; ancient kingdoms in Spain. Cat-*-lo'-ni-a ; a considerable province in Spain to the north. east. Ca'u-ca-sus ; a chain of mountains between the Black Sea and the Caspian. Cay-e'nnc ; a French scttle.nent in Guyana. CeM-e-bcs ; a large island of the Oriental Archipelago. Ceph-a-lo-ni'a (pron. Chef-a-lo-ni'a) ; one of the seven Ionian Islands. Cey-lo'n (Se-lon); a large island in the East Indies, subject to Gresit Britain. Clial-d»-a ( Kal-de-a) ; an Micaent kingdom, part of Babylon. Cha-U-cut ( Kal-le-cut) ; the present capital of Tigre, in Abys. sinia. Cha'm-pagne (pron. Sbam-paine) a former province of France, famous for its wines. Chan-si>a ; a country of A&ia, tributary to lliusia. Vocabulary of Proper Names. 187 Co -burg; a principality of Upper Saxony. Co-cliin-Chi'-na ; a kingdom of eastern Asia, which now holda sway over Cambodia, Tonquin, and Tsiampa. Co-i'm-bra ; a city with the chief university of Portugal. Co-lo'gne (pron. Co-lo'yne); a city in the duchy of the Rliinc. Co-lf/m-bi-a ; a republican state in the north of South Ame- rica, now divided into New Grenada, Venezuela, and the Equador. Co-lu'm-bi-a, the ; a large river of North America, running into the Pacific Ocean. Co-lu'nn-bi-a ; a district of the United States, containing Wash. ington, the capital. Co^n-go ; a kingdom in western Africa. Con-nau'ght ; the western province of Ireland. Con-ne'c-ti-cut ; one of the States of New England. Con-stan-ti-no'-ple ; a gieat city, the capital of Turkey. Co-pen-ha -gen ; the capital of Dennmrk. Cor-cy -ra ; an ancient island, now Corfu. Cnr-do-va; an ancient kingdom and city in Spain, with a splendid cathedral. Cor-fu' ; the ancient Corey ra, an island and city, capital of thtt Ionian republic. GZ-rinth ; a rery ancient town of the Morea, now decayed. Cork ; a county and great seaport in the south of Ireland. Cornwall ; a county of England, famous for its tin. Co-ro-ma'n-del ; the eastern coast of the Deccan, in India* Co'r-si-ca ; an island in the Mediterranean, now French. Cor-to'-na ; an ancient town in Tuscany. Co-ru'n«na; a noted seaport in the north of Spain. Cra'-cow ; a small free city and territory of Poland. Crc-mo'-na ; an ancient town of Milan in Italy. Cre's-sy ; a village of France, famous for the battle of 1S46. Cron-sta'dt ; a large town, the port of Pctersburgh. Cu'-ba ; the largest island in the West Indies, belonging to Spain. Cu'-ma-na ; a large city of Colombia, in South America. Cuz-co ; a large city, the ancient capital of Peru. Cy-cla-des ; small idands of the Grecian Archipelago. Cy-prus ; a large and fertile island in the Levant. Da-bul ; a town on the coast of Malabar, in India* Dac-li*a; a northtm province of Sweden. DaWbe-a; a great lake and district of Abyssinia. Da mi-et-u ; a considerable seaport of Egypt, on a branch of the Nile. Da'nt-Eic; a great commercial town in Prussian Poland, at the mouth of tlie Vistula. Da'n-ube ; the largest river in Europe, flowing through Ger. many and Turkey, and falling into the Black Sea. Dar-da-nelles ; two ancient castles, protecting the Bosphorus, or Strait of Constantinople. Da'r-fur ; a large but rude kingdom of Interior Africa. Da'-ri^n ; a narrow istlimus connecting North and South America. Dau'-phi*ny ; a mountainous province in the south of France. Dec-con ; the Peninsula, or southern part, of Hindostan. De-la. ware ; a great river, and one of the States of North America. Del-hi; a province and great capital of northern Hindostan. De'-los ; an island in the Archipelago. Del-ta ; the northern part of Egypt, intersected by branches of the Nik. De-me-ra'-ra ; a rich British settlement on the coast of Guiunn. De'n-mark ; a small kingdom of northern Europe. Der-by ; a fine town of England, with flourishing manufactures. Deux-Ponts (Zwei-Briicken); a town on the Rhine. Di-ar-be'-kir ; a mountainous province of Asiatic Turkey. Dieppe (pron. Dec-eppe) ; a seaport in the north of France. Di'-jon ; n large city of France, capital of Burgundy. Di-u ; an island and town of Guiarat, belonging to Portugnl. Do-mi'n-go, St. ; a large West India island, now Hayti. Do-min-i'-ca ; a British island in the West Indies. Don, or Ta-na'-is ; a great river, running into the Black Sea. Don-go'-la ; a kingdom and two towns in Nubia. DoV-drecht (pron. Dor-dreckt) ; a trading town in Holland. Do -ver ; a port of England, whence travellers usually sail for France. Dou-ro' ; a large river flowing through Spain and Portugal. DreVden ; the capital of the kingdom of Saxony. Dro'n-thcim ; a city of Norway, towards the north. Dub-Iin ; the capital of Ireland. Dun-dee ; a great commercial town in the east of Scotland. Du'n-kirk ; a seaport in the north of France. Vocabulary of Proper Names, 189 DuV-ham ; n handflomc city In tlic north of England. Du't-iwl-dorf ; a Imndnomc town in the duchy of the iUiino. Dwi'.na ; two coMHideruhle rivers of llumia. K'-hoe ; tt great trading city and district of Africa, ou tho Niger. F/-hro ; a large river in the cant of Spain. Fd'-in-burgh ; the capital of Scotland. K'-gypt ; an ancient kingdom of Africa, nominally a province of Turkey* but really independent. Kl'-ba ; an island on the coast of Tuscany. K11k> (pron. £lb) ; a large river of Gcrnmny. ICUe-pha'n-ta ; an island near Bombay, with remarkable anti< quitiea. EUsi-nore, a seaport of Denmark, commanding the Sound. Km'den ; the principal seaport of Hanover. Eng'-land ; tho souUiern part of Great Britain, containing 40 counties. £-o-li-an Isles ; a volcanic cluster to the north of Sicily. K-pi'-rus ; an ancient country, now part of European Turkey. Er'-furt ; the capital of Thuringia, in Prussian Saxony. E-ri-e; a large lake in North America. E-ri-va'n (pron. £-ri-va'un) ; a town and province of Persia. Erne ; an extensive and beautiful lake in Ireland. Er-ze-rum (pron. £r-xe-ro^om) ; the capital of Armenia. Es-cu'-ri-al ; a palace in New Castile, in Spain. Es-qui-ma'ux (pron. Ess-ki-mo') ; an uncivilised people in North America and Greenland. Es-tre>ma-du'«ra ; a central province of Spain. E.thi*o'-pi-a ; the ancient name of Nubia and Abyssinia. Et'-na ; a lofty volcanic mountain in Sicily. £-tru-ria ; the ancient name of Tuscany. Eu-phra'-tes ; a great river in Asia, which falls into the Persian Gulf. Eu-rope ; the smallest quarter of the world, but the most dis- tinguished for power, arts, and civilisation. E'v-reux (pron. Evero') ; a large town in the north of France, £'x-e-ter, a large city, the capital of Devonshire. Eyeo ; a large town, capital of Yarriba, in central Africa. Fars, or Pars ; a province in the south of Persia. Fas, or Fez ; a province and large city of Morocco. Fer-na'n-do Po ; a mountainous island in the Gulf of Benin* where Britain has lately formed a settlement. Fer-ra'-ra ; a fine and ancient city of Italy. Fei'-ro ; the westernmost of the Canary Islands. 190 Voeabulaty qf Proper Hamei, F«'r*rol ; • naval lUtion in th« N. W. of S|Miin. F«t-nn; a country of interior Afrioa, with a great inland trada. Ff'n-land ; a northern provinec of Rumia. Fla^n-den, Eatt and West ; two fine provincea of Belgium. Flor'-ence ; the capital city of Tuscany. Flo-ri'-da (pron. Flo-re'e-da) ; a territory of North Atn»i rica. Fluah-ing ; a remarkable leaport of Zealand in Holland. Fo'-ki-en ; a province in China. Fon-ta-ra'-bi-a ; a tmAll ieaport of Biscay, in Spain. For-mo'-M (properly Taiwan) ; a large island near Cliin.^ For-t«-ven-tu*ra; one of the small Canary Islands. France ; a great and powerful kingdom in Europe. France, Isle of; in the Indian Ocean ; now the Mauritius. Fra^nk-fort ; an independent city on the river Maync, in (icr. many ; also one on the Oder, in Prussia. Fre'd-er-icks-burg ; a considerable town in Norwny. Fre'd-er-ick-toWh ; the capiul of New Brunswick, in North America. Fro-i-berg ; a town of Saiony, celebrated for its mines. Frey-burg (pron. Fry'-burg) ; a town in the duchy of Bad«n, formerly the capital of the Brisgau. Fri'-btirg (pron. Fre'e-burg) ; one of the Swiss Cantons. Friendly Islands; a group of fine islands in tlie Pacitir Ocean. Frie's-land (pron. Fre'ei Uuid); a province of tho Dutch Netherlands. Fri'.u-H; a province of Italy, on the north-east. Fron-tig.oi-a'c (pron. Froti-tin-ya'o) ; a town in the south of France, noted fur its wines. Fu'n-da ; a large eommercial town on tho Tihaddai in cent nil Aft'ica. Gai-e'-ta ; a celebratad town of Npplcs. Gal-i'-ci*a; a province of Spain, in the north-west. Gal-li'-ci-a ; a kingdom of the Austrian monarchy. Ga'1-i'lee ; a country of ancient Palestine. Gall, St. ; a considerable town in Switzerland. Ga'm-bi-a ; a great river of Negroland, in western Africa. Ga'n-ges ; a eelebrated river of India. Ga'ft-C9-ny ; a former province of France, in the S. VV. Ga'-sa ; an anoient town in Palestine. Gel'der-land; a province of the Dutch Netherlands. Ge-ne'-va ; a republican canton and city of SwitzcTJand. Vocahuiary of Proper Namei* 191 Ctv*t\'0'U \ onot ft repuhlio, now • province of Sirdinift. (jvorgv, 8c. ; a Rtrong fort at MttdroK, in India. Cfvorge, St. ; tho largcat of Ihv livrniutliw i»iund«. Gtt or-gi-ft ; ft province of Asiatic Kumiu. (iuor-gi-ft; ft southern Stnte of North Amoricw. Gc'or-gi-ftn Itlca; n large group in thu Arctic Oceftn, dif* covered by Captain Parry. Ge'r-ina-ny ; ft Urge portion of Kurope, divlflvd into nuiny Ntatct. Ghent (pron. Gent ftnd Gonn); the chief town in Efttl Flanden. GiiiMun (pron. Gre-laun) ; a province of western Persia. Gib-rnUtar ; a strong town and fort in Spain, belonging to Great llritain. Gi-lo'-lo; the largest of the Molucca Ulands. Gi'r-genti; a city of Sicily, with fine ruins of the ancient Agrigentum. Gla'-riii ; one of the twenty-two cantons of Switzerland. GlttVgow ; a large and flourishing city in tho West of Scotland* (ilttt2 ; a considerable town in Uohcmia. Glo'-ces-ter (pron. GUA-tcr) ; a county and city of England* Gol-co'n-dft; a province of southern Ilindmtan. Gotn-bro'n (pron. Gom-bro'on) ; a seaport in Persia* Go'n-dar ; the capital of Abyssinia. Good- 1 lope; a large British colony; the sotithcrnmost part of Africa. Its Cape is the south-west point. Go't>i-ard| St. ; a high mountain in Switzerland. Gu't-tcn-burg ; the chief commercial town in Sweden. Got-ti'n-gcn; a large town in Hanover, with a famous uni* versity. Go'-tha ; ft principftlity (A Upper Saxony. Gra-na'-da ; a city and fertile province in the south of Spain. Gratz; the capital of Styrio, in Austria. Grave (pron. Graav) ; a strong town of the central Nether* lands. Great Britain ; the name of the largest of the British Islands, fully described in the Grammar of British Geography. Greece; a celebrated country, once included in European Turkey, now independent. Greeks ; the natives of Greece ; also those inhabitants of Turkey who are of the Greek church. Gre'cn-land ; a large country of the Arctic Seas, celebrated for the whvle 6shcry on its coasts. Gre'en-ock ; a great commercial town in the west of Scotland* 192 Vocabulary of Proper fflames. Gre-nfiix ; a town of Yorkshire, carrying on great woollen manufactures. Ha'-lifax; the capital of Nova Scotia. Ha'm-burg ; a large independent city in the north of Germany. Ha'.mi ; a country and city of Chinese Tartary. Ha'n-o-ver ; a kingdom of Germany, belonging to the king of England. Hanse Towns ; an ancient confederacy of seapovt towns, united for common interest, as Hamburg, Bremen, Dantzick. Ha'r-wich (pron. Har-ridge) ; a seaport town of Essex. Ha-va'n-na ; the capital of Cuba, in the West Indies. Havre-de- Grace (pron. Ha'-av) ; a seaport town in the north of France. He'b-ri-des, (properly HeJ}u-des^ ; islands on the west of Scotland. Heib-ri-des, New; islands on the western side of the Pacific Ocean. He'i-del-berg ; an ancient and considerable town of the Grand Duchy of Baden. He-le'-na, 3^ > An island in the Atlantic, subject to Britain. He'l-voet-sluys (pron. Hel-vet-sloos) ; a maritime town of Holiant.^ Her-cu-la'-nc>um ; ar ancient city of Naples, overwhelmed hy the eruptions of Vesuvius, lately opened. Iler-man-sta'dt; the capital of Transylvania. Ilertsberg, or llcrz-berg, a tou-n of Prussian Saxony^ Vocabulary/ of Proper Names, 199 Hesse (pron. Hess) Darm-stadt ; a grand duchy of Germany, of which Darmstadt is the capital. Hesse (pron. Hess), Electoral j a sovereignty of Germany, of which Cassel is the capital. Hi-c-ro'p-o-lis ; an ancient town of Asia Minor. Him-a-la'-yah ; a range of mountains in India, the highest in the world. Hin-do-sta'n ; that part of India which is within the Ganges. His-pan-i-o'-la ; the eastern half of the island of St Domingo. Ho'-ang-ho ; a very great river which runs across China. Ho-bart-town ; the capital town of Van Diemen's Land. Ilogue'; a town of France, on the north coast, near Capo Barfleur. IIn)1-land, North and South ; two provinces of Holland. Ilo'l-land ; a new kingdom formed of the Seven United Pro- vinces. Hol-stein ; a province of Germany, subject to Denmark. Ho'- ly- head; a port of North Wales, whence packets sail fur Dublin. Hon-du-ras ; a province of New Spain, in the West Indies. Hoo-Qua'ng (pron. Hu-ca'ng) ; a province of China. Ho'-reb ; a famous mountain in the north. west of Arabia. Horn, Cape ; the most southern point of America. Hou's-sa; a large and populous region in the interior of Africa. Hu'd-son's Bay; a large gulf of North America. Hull ; a great commercial town in the east of JCngland. Hu'n-ga-ry ; a kingdom now included in the Austrian empire* Hu'-ron ; an extensive lake in Canada. Hy'-dra ; a Greek island, famous for its commerce and navy. Hy-dra>ba'd ; the capital of the Deccan in Hindastan. Hyr-ca'-ni-a ; the ancient name of a country in Persia. Ja-co'-ba; a kingdom and city of interior Africa, on the Shary. Ja'f-fa (pron. Yaf-fa) ; a town of Palestine ; the ancient Joppa. /a.ma'i-ca; the principal of the English West India Islands. Ja-ne'i-ro (pron. Ja-ne'-ro) ; » province of Brasil. la'n-ni-na (pron. Ya'n-ni-na); a strong town, the present capital of Albania. Ja-pan; an empire of eastern Asia, composed of several large islands. Ja'-va ; the most fertile island of the Indian Archipelago. Tee-land ; a large island in the Northern Ocean, belonging to Denmark. 8 104 Vocabulaty of Proper Names. I'da ; a famous mountain in the island of Candia. I-du-mc'-a, or E'dom ; an ancient country near Palestine. Jc'd-do; the metropolis of the empire of Japan. Jc -na ; a town of Upper Saxony, where Napoleon gained i famous victory in 1806. Jen-ne' ; a great commercial city of Africa, on the Niger. JeV-sey ; a British island near the coast of France. Je.ru'-sa-lem ; a famous city» capital of Judea and of Palestine. Je's-so (pron. Ye'd-so) ; a large island, tributary to Japan. 11-li-nois ; a river and State in North America. In-di-a'-na ; one of the United States in North America. In^iest East, comprehend all the countries of Asia watered by the Indian Ocean. In' -diet. West, comprehend a vast number of fertile islands, of all sizes, between North and South America. In'-das; a large river of Asia, flowing along the west of Hin. dostan. In-gol-sta'dt ; a considerable town of Bavaria. In -gri-a; a province of Russia, in the government of Petersburg In-nis-kil-len ; a strong town of Ulster, in Ireland. Ins-pruck ; a town in the Tyrol, a province of Austria. In-ve'r-ness ; a large town in the north of Scotland. I-o'-ni-an Islands; seven islands, on the western coast of Greece, under the protection of Great Britain. JoV-dan ; the principal river of ancient Judea, and modern Palestine, i'. ^re-land ; one of the British Isles, a fine and fertile country* IV-koutsk, the capital of eastern Siberia. Ir'.tysh ; a large river of Tobolsk, in Asiatic Russia. Is'-mail ; a very strong fortress of Bessarabia, stormed hj Suwarrow. Is-pa-ha n ; the former capital of Persia. Is'-tria ; a province of Austria on the Adriatic Sea. It'-a-ly ; a very large and fine country in the south of Europe. Ith'-a-ca, now Te«a'-ki ; one of the Ionian Islands. Iv'-i-ca'; an island of Spain, in the Mediterranean Sea. Ju't-land ; a peninsula, the chief part of Denmark. Ka'f-fa ; a sea-port of Crim Tartary, now Russian. Kamt»-cha't-ka ; a large peninsula, on the east of Asiatic Russia. Ka'-no; the chief commercial city in the east of central Africa. Ka'sh-na ; a large kingdom and city in central Africa. Kehl ; a strong fortress on the Rhine, in the duchy of Baden Ip-sa'-ra ; a Greek island, distinguished in the late war. Vocabulary of Proper Names, 195 Kcn-tu'c-ky; one of the United States in North America. Ke'r-ry ; a county in Ireland, provmc^of Munster. • Kho'n-deish, or Can-deish ; a province in the west of Ilindostan. Kho'-jend ; a large city of Independent Tartary. Kbo^-ten ; a fertile country, and a city in Chinese Tartary. K)'-a-ma ; a country and city of Africa, west of the xTiger. Ki'-an-nan ; a province of China. Ki'-an-si ; a province of China. Kiel ; a large and strong town of Holstein. Kil-ke'n-ny ; a county and large town of Leinster, in Ireland. Ki'1-la'r-ney ; a town and beautiful lake in the south of Ireland. Ki ngs-ton ; the chief seaport in Jamaica. Ki'ngs-ton ; the principal town in Upper Canada. Kin-sale; an ancient and considerable port in the south ol Ireland. Ki'-ov ; the capital of the Russian Ukraine. Kir-rce; a trading town at the head of the delta of the Niger. Ko'-la ; the capital of Russian Lapland. Ko'n igs-berg ; the capital of Regal or Eastern Prussia. Ku-ri-les; a cluster of islands in the sea of Kamtschatka. Lab.ra-do r ; a large but barren country in North America. La-da'uk ; a considerable country aiid city of Thibet. La-do -ga ; a considerable lake of Russia in Europe. La-dro'-ne, or Ma-ri-an Islands ; a cluster of isles on the western side of the Pacific Ocean, subject to Spain. La-ho're ; a province and great city of western Hindostan. La'-nark ; a county and town in Scotland* Lan-da'u ; a strong town near the Rhine, belonging to Bavaria. Lan-dre'-cy ; a town of France, in the north-east. La'nds-hut ; a strong town of Bavaria. Lands-kro'-na ; a seaport town of Sweden, on the Baltic. Lan-gue-do'c ; a large province in the south of France. La'-os ; a country of the eastern Indian peninsula, lia'p-land ; a large country in the north of Europe. La-ri's-sa ; an ancient town of Thessaly, in Greece. Las-sa ; the capital of Thibet, ia Asia. La't-t»*koo; a considerable town of South Africa, in the Boshuana country. Lau-sa'nne (pron. Lo*sa'n); a pleasant town on the lake of G eneva. La'w-rence, St. ; a great river of North America, flowing thiough Canada. La'y bach ; the capital of Carniola in Austria. Lc'-ba-non ; a higli mountain in Syria, famous for its cedars. s 2 196 Vocabulary of Proper Names. Leeds ; ft large town in Yorkshire, the chief scat of the woollen manufacture. Le'g-horn (pron. L^'-gorn, properly Livorno); a maritime town of Tuscany. Lc'-in-ster ; (pron. Le^an-ster ;) the eastern division of Ireland. I^'ip-xig; a large town of Saxony, noted for its fairs. Le'-man ; a beautiful lake in Switzerland, generally called the J«Ake of Geneva. L(/m-l>erg ; the capital of Gallicia. I/e'm-nos ; an island oflT the entrance of the Dardanelles. Le'-o-minster (pron. Le'm-ster) ; a town of Herefordshire. Le-o-to'ng ; a province bordering on the Chinese Empire. Le-pa'n-to; a gulf and sea-port of Greece, where a femous naval battle was fought. Lcu-ca'-dia (now Santa Maura) ; one of the Ionian Islands. Le'w-is ; a lafge island, part of the Scottish Hebrides. Le'y-den ; a large town and university of Holland. Li -be-ri-a ; an American settlement lately formed in Western Africa. Liege ; a city and province of Belgium. Li'-ma ; the middle division and capital of Peru. Iii'm-burg ; a province of Belgium, partly Dutch. Li'-me-rick ; (pron. Li'm-rick ;) a county and large city of Munster, in Ireland. Li'n-coln ; a handsome inland city in the east of England. Li-pa'-ri; one of the Eolian Isles off the coast of Sicily. Li'p>pe ; a small ])rincipality uf Northern Germany. Li's-bon; t' e capital of Portugal, on the Tagus. Lisle, or Lille ; a large and strong town in the north of France. Lith-u-a -ni-a ; a large country, formerly Polish, now Russian. Li-va-di-a ; a province and town of Greece. Li -ver-pool ; a very great commercial city on the western coast of England. Lo-a'n-go ; ft country of Western Africa. Loch-a'-ber (pron. Lo'-ha-ber); a district of Inverness, in the north of Scotland. Lo -di ; a town of Lombardy, where Napoleon gained a gnut battle. Lo'g-piin; an industrious ftnd populous country of Central Africa. Loire ; the largest river in France. Ix>'m-!>ar.dy ; a kingdom which forr.ierly included the wliole north of Italy, now Austrian. Lo'-mond| Loch ; a large lak<^ in the west of Scotland. e western Vocabulary of Proper Names, 1 97 Lo'n-don ; the capital of the United Empire of Great Britain and Ireland, one of the largest and the most commercial cities in the world. Lo'n-don-de'r-ry ; a county and city of Ulster, in Ireland. Loo-choo' Isles ; a noted group lying to the east of China. Lo.rc't-to ; a town in Roman Italy, where there is a famous L'O'ri-ent ; a considerable sea-port of Britany, in France. Lo'-thi-an ; a fertile district of Scotland, which includes Edin- burgh, the capital. Lou-is-burg; (pron. Lo'o-is-burg ;) a petty village, once the capital of Breton Island, in North America. Lo'u-is, St J the largest town of the Missouri State in America. Lou-is-i-a'-na ; a southern state of North America. Lou-is-vi'lle ; the largest town of Kentucky, in America. Lou-vain, or Leuven ; a large town of Brabant, in the Ne- therlands. Lu-be'c ; an independent city in the north of Germany. Lu-ca y-o ; the chief of the Bahama Islands. Lu'c-ca ; a duchy of northern Italy. Lu-ce'rne ; a canton, city, and extensive lake in Switzerland. Lu'-ci-a, St. ; one of the West Indian Islands, belonging to Great Britain. Lu'ck-now ; a splendid city, the capital of Oude in India. Lu'>nen-burg ; a province of the kingdom of Hanover. liU'ne-vtHe ; (pron. Lune-veel ;) a town of Lorraine in the >T. E. of France. Lu'x-em-burg ; a grand duchv and city of Germany, annexed mostly to Holland, but a part to Belgium. Ly'-on-nois (pron. Le^>on-nay) ; a former province of France. Ly'-ons ; the second city in France, where there are great silk manu^ctures. INIa-ca'-o ; a Portuguese island near Canton, in China. Ma'-cas-sar ; a kingdom of Celebes, in the East Indies. Mad-a-gaVcar ; a large island in the Indian Ocean, east of Africa. Ma-dei'-ras (pro. Ma-de'-ras) ; Madeira Proper, Porto- Santo, and the Desertas ; islands in the Atlantic Ocean. Ma-dra s ; a great city and presidency of British India. Ma-dri'd ; the capital of Spain. Ma-du'-ra ; a small southern province of Hindostan. Ma'es-tricht ; a strong town in Belgium, but attached by treaty to Holland. Ma'g-de-burg ; the capital of Prussian Saxony. 8 3 198 Vocabulary of Proper /Vames. Ma-ge1-Un; a famous strait in the southern part of SouUi America* leading into the Pacific. Maine, or Mayn ; a largo river of Germany. Maine ; a former province in the west of France. Maine; the north-easternmost of tlio United States, America. Ma-JoV-ca ; an island of Spain, in the Mediterranean. Ma-la-ba'r ; a part of the western coast of Hindostan. Ma'-la*ga ; a great commercial city on the south coast of Spain. Ma-lav>a, or Ma-la'c-ca; a peninsula in the south of Asia, lately ceded to England, containing the sea-port of Malacca. Mal-di-ves ; a cluster of small islands west of Malabar. Ma'-lo, St. ; a sea-port town in the north of France. Ma'l-ta ; an island in the Mediterranean! belonging to Great Britain. Man ; an island between England and Ireland. Ma'n-ches-ter : a great city, the chief scat of the cotton ma. nufacture in Britain. Man-ga-loVe ; a sea-port town on the coast of Malabar. Ma'nn-heim ; a strong fortified town of tlie duchy of Baden, in Germany. Ma-nil-la ; the capital of the Philippine Islands. Ma'n-tu-a ; a considerable duchy and city in Austrian Italy Ma>ra-ca'y-bo ; a province and sea-port of Columbia. MaV-a-thon ; a village of Attica, in Ancient Greece. Mar-a-no'n, commonly Amazons; a great river of South America. Ma-ran-ha'm ; a province and sea-port on the north coa.st of Brasil. Ma-re' n-go; a town of Piedmont, where Napoleon gained a fiunous battle. M»-ri'-no (pron. Ma-ree'-no), St ; a little republic of Italy. Ma'r-ly ; a village near Versailles, with a vast aqueduct. Mar-mo'-ra, the Sea of; connects the Black Sea with the Archipelago. Mar-que'*8as ; a considerable group of islands in the Pacific Ocean. Mar-se'illes ; the chief sea-port in the south of France. Mar-ta-lkan ; a province of the Birman Empire. Mar-ti-ni'-que ; an island in tlie West Indies, belonging to France. MaV-war ; a powerful R^poot principality in the west of India. Ma^-ry-lmnd ; erne of the United States of North America. Maa-aa-chu'-aets ; one of the United States of North America. M»4u'-ah ; the principal sea-port of Abyssinia. Vacabulary nf Proper Names. m Ma-su-li-pfl-tam' ; ft great manufucturiiig town on tlic Coro- mandel coaU of Ilindostan. Ma'-ta-pan, Cape ; the most southern cnpe of the Morea. Mau>ri'-ti-u8 ; an island in the Indian Sea, captured from France by Great Britain. Mc-a'-co ; the ecclesiastical capital of Japan. ^ Me'c-ca ; the chief town of Arabia, the place of Mahomet's nativity. Me'ck-len-burg-Schwe'-rin, and Me'ck-lcn-burg Strelitz ; two grand duchies of Northern Germany. Me'ch-lin ; a city of Belgium) famous for its lace. Med-i-ter-ra'-ne-an Sea; the sea brtween Europe and Afrtcai so called from its being nearly surrounded by land. Me'i-nen-gen ; a principality of Upper Saxony. Me'-i-nam ; a great river, which flows through Siam. Me -mel ; the chief commercial town of East I'russia. Me'1-ville; a large island in the Arctic Sea, discovered by Captain Parry. Mentz ; a considerable city in the duchy of Hesse- Darmstadt. Mcs-o-po-ta'-mi-a ; the ancient name of Diarbekr and Al- gesira. Mes-si'-na ; the chief commercial town in Sicily. Me'x-i->co ; a great country and city of America. Mi'-chi-gan; a lake and territory of the United States of America. Mi'd-del-burg ; a strong town of Holland, in the Isle of WaU cheren. Mil-an ; a duchy of Lombardy, of which Milan is the capital. Mi'1-ford ; a new town of Milford> Haven, in South Wales. Min-da-na'-o ; the largest of the Philippine Islands. Min-gre'-li-a ; a country of Asia, bordering on the Black Sea. now Kussian. Mi-no'r-ca; an island of Spain, in the Mediterranean Sea. Mi-si'-tra; a village on the Morea : the ancient Sparta. Mis.sis*si'p-pi ; a great river in North America, and one or the States of the Union. Mis-so-lo'ng-hi ; the chief town of western Greece, famous for its brave defence in the late war. Mis-sou'-ri ; the greatest river in North America ; also one o( the United States. Mo-ca-ra'R.ga ; a kingdom of Africa, in the south east. Mo' cha (pron« Mo-ka); the chief sea-port of Y^men or Arabm Felix. Mo'-dc-na; a duchy in northern Italy. 800 Vocabulary of Proper Names. Mo-ga-d(/re ; the chief commercial town of Morocco. Mol-da'«W-a ; a province of European Turkey* partly pov ■esaed by Runia. Mo-lu'o-cat ; a cluster of islands soutii of the Philippines. Mons ; the capital of Hainault, in the Netherlands. Mon-tre'al ; a large and flourishing town of Canada. Mo'n-te Vi'-de-o; a town on the river of La Plata, in South America. Mont-pe1-li.er ; a large town in theeouth of France, colebratvc) for the salubrity of its air. Mo-ra'-vi-a ; a country of Germany belonging to Austria. Mo-re'^a ; the ancient Pcloponnesiu of Greece. Mo-ro'o-co ; a large empire in Barbary, or northern Africa. Mo's-cow (pron. Mos-co) ; the ancient capital of Russia. Mo-seO-le; a large river of Germany, which falls into the Rhine. Mo'.sul ; a city of Asiatic Turkey, on the Tigris. Mou1-tan ; a province and city of western India, on the Indus. Mo>sam-bi'que (pron. Mo-sa'm«be ek) ; a territory of eastern Africa, subject to the Portuguese. Mu'-nich (pron. Mu'-nic) ; the capital of Bavaria. Mu'n-ster ; the southern province of Ireland. Mii'n-stcr ; the capital of Westphalia, in the duchy of the Rlp'ne* MuV-ci-a ; a kingdom of Old Spain. Mu's-cat ; a sea-port and state on the cast coast of Arabia. My'-sore; a fine country of southern India. Na-muV ; a province and city of Belgium, ^a'o-cy ; a city of France, in the north-east Nan-kin ; a very large city in China. Nantes ; a large ancient town of France on the Loirew Na'-ples ; a fertile kingdom in the south of Italy. Na-po^-li de Ro>ma'-ni.a, and Na-p-oli de Mal-va'-si-a ; two Urge sea-ports in the Morea. Na'r-bonne ; an ancient tovm in the south of France. Nas-aa'u (pron. N»-so) ; a grand duchy on the Upper Rhine, in Gernumy. Na-to'-l|-a, now Anadoli ; a province of Asiatie Turkey. Na-va-ri'-no ; the chief sea-port of the Morea* Na-va'rre ; a mountainous province of Spain. Na'z-os ; an island in the Archipelago. Na's-a-reth ; a celebrated village of Palestine. Neagb ; the name of the largest lake in Ireland. Ne-ga-pa-tafm ; a town on the Coromandel coast, Hindostan. Ne'd-jed : h large division of Arabia, the scat of the Wahabiti's Vocabulary of Proper Names. 201 Nc'-gro-land, Sou'-dnn, or Ni-gri'-tia; a largo tract of country iii central Africa. Ne'-gro-pont ; a Greek island in the Archipelago. Ne'-paul ; a powerful kingdom in tlie north of India. Nc-ri'nsk ; a strong town in Siberia. Ne'th-er-land». Sec Holland and Delgium. Neufchd-te'l (pron. Nceu'-shat-tcl) j a principality of Swiucr- land. Nu'wcas-tle; a great commercial city in the north of England. New Uru'ns-wick ; a country of British America. New found-Ia'nd ; a large island on the eastern coost of North America, noted for the cod fishery. New Ila'mp-shire ; one of the States of North America* New Jer'-sy ; one of the States of North America. New York; the most flourishing State of North America. New York ; the capital of the State, and tin; largest city in America. Ni-a'g-a-ra; a river in North America, celebrated for its cata- racts, between the io-li ; a strong town of Bulgaria, in European Turkey. Nie'stcr, ctr Dnie'ster (pro. Nees' -ter) ; a large river that falls into the Black Sea. Nicu-port; a sea-port town of Flanders. Ni'-ger, Joliba, or Quorra; a very lurge African river, which flows into the gulf of Guinea. Nile ; a celebrated river of Epvpt and Nubia. Ni'me-guen ; the capital of ouelderland in Holland. Ni'n-e-veh *, an ancient city, capital of Assyria. Noot'-ka Sound; an inlet on tlie western coast of North America. No'r-man-dy ; a former province in the north of France. North Ca-ro-li'-na ; one of the States of North Ameriea. /Co'r-way ; a large country of northern Europe, united to Sweden. Nor-wich ; an ancient large city in the east of England. Kut'-ting^ham ; a large manufacturing town in tlie central part of England. No'-va Sco'.tia ; a considerable country of Biitish America. No'-va Zem'>bla : two great uninhabited islandsof the Arctio Ocean, belonging to liussia. No'>vo-go-rod, Great ; an ancient decayed city of Russia. 802 Vocabulary of Proper Nam$$. N(/-TO-go-rod» Little; a town of Ruiaia, where tlie grcntcnt fair in Europe ii held. Nu'-bia; an extensive country of Eautcrn Africa. Nu-ina'n>ti>a ; an ancient town of Spain, now in ruins. Ku'- rem. berg; a town of Bavaria, the former capital of Franconia. O'-bi ; a large river in Asiatic Russia. O-den-se'c ; tlie capiul of the island of Funen, In Denmark. O-de's-aa ; a great seaport of Russia, on the Ulack Sea. O-eMand ; an island oS Sweden in the Baltio Sea. O-hi'-o ; a river, and one of tlie States, in North America. Old-en-burg ; a large duchy in northern Germany. Ol'-muti ; the capital of Moravia. O-ly'm-pus ; a celebrated mountain on the north of ancient Thesaaly, in Greece ; also one in Asia Minor. O-ne'-ga ; a large lake of European Russia. O-ne'g-li-a ; a seaport town of Genoa. OcMii-po^or ; a fine city, capital of Mcwar, in India. Oo-na-la'sh-ka ; an island in the Aleutian Archi|)cIago. On-ta'-ri-o; a large lake between Canada and the United Sutes. O-poV-to, or Porto ; a great seaport town of Portugal. 0>ri-e'n-tal Archipelago ; the islands off* the southern part of the continent of Asia, of which the chief are Sunuitiu, Java, Bornea the Philippine Islands, Celebes, &c« O-ri-no'-ko ; a large river of South America. O-ri's-sa; a province of eastern Hindostan. O'rk-neys ; islands in the north of Scotland. Or'-lean-nois ; a former province near the middle of France. Or'-leans ; a fine ancient city of France, on the Loire. Or'-leans, New ; a great commercial city of America, at tlie mouth of the Mississippi. Or'.rous; an island in the Persian Gulf. Oa'-n*>bruck ; a province of the kingdom of Hanover. Os-te'nd ; a ttrong and commercial town of West Flanders. Os'-ti-aks ; a people of Siberia, who inhabit the banks of tlie river ObL (y-ta-heite ; the chief of the Society Islands in the South Sea. Cyt>cha-kov ; a town of the government of Chcrson, on tiie BbckSea. O-tra'n-to; a province and city of Naples in the soutli east. O't-to-man Empire; the empire of Turkey. Ou'-ral, or Uralian mountains ; a great range of moimtains in Russia, separating Europe from Asia. O-vcr-yVsel ; a province of Holland. indcpcndont Vocabulary of Proper t^amei. 203 O-vi-e'-do (pron. 0-vc-«-do) ; an cpiNcopal toirn of AiCuHm in Spain. O-why-ht/o ; the most cutvrly of llio Sandwich Itlanda. (Vi-furd ; a flno city and fkmouA university In England. O'z-UA, or Amoo ; a Urge river of Asia, in Indepe Tartary. Pa-cl'f-ic Ocean ; the great ocean which divides Asia from America. Ta-da'ng ; the capital of the Dutch settlements in Sumatra. IVd-u-a ; a celebrated city in the State of Venice. IVis-Icy ; a very greac maufacturing town in the west of Scotland. Ptt-ltt't-i-nate ; a former province of Germany, divided into tlio upper and lower; the first being the Pulatinute of Ilavaria, and the second the Palatinate of the Ilhiiie. Pa'1-er-mo ; a large and Ijeautiful city, capital of Sicily. Pa'l-«s-tine ; the ancient Jodea, now part of Asiatic Turkey. Pal.my'-ra ; the ruins of a magnificent city of Arabia Dcscrta. Pam-pe-lu'-na ; a very strong city of Navarre, in Spain. Pa-na-ma' ; the name cf the isthmus which connects North and South America, and of a city on the same. Pa'n-nah ; a district of India, containing the finest diamonds in the world. Pa'-pu-a ; a large island, north of Australia, commonly called New Guinea. Pa-ra' ; a considerable town in the north of Brazil. Par-agua'y ; an extensive country of South America. Pa'-ris ; the metropolis of France. PaV-ma ; a duchy of Italy, given to the ex-empress of Franca. Par-na's-sus ; a famous mountain of Livadia, in Greece. Pa'-ros ; one of the Cyclades, famous for its marble. PaVco; a town of Peru, with very rich silver mineSc Pat-a-go-'ni-a ; a large territory of South America. Pa't-mos,or Pat-mo'-sa; a small island in the Archipelago. Pa't-na ; a large city of Hindostan, on the Ganges. Pa't-ras ; a seaport town hi the north-west of the Mores. Pa'-vi-a ; a city of Milan, in Italy. Pe-gu' ; a kingdom of the Birman empire. Pe.ki'n ; the metropolis of China. Pe-Ie'w IsUuids; a group to the cast of the Philippine Islandsb Pe-lo-pon^ne'-sus; an ancieui peninsula of Greece, now tht Morea. Pe'm-broke ; a maritime county of 5k)uth Wales. Penn-syl-va'-ni-a ; one of the United States of North America. 201 Vocalmlary nf Proper Namei, P«ii.mi.co'-1a ; • town of FliMrhU, near the Gulf of Meticn^ IVr-go-inm; an uncii'nt town in Nutnlia, now IVrgamu. IVr-natn-bir>co ; a conMiiiiTalilo 8va|> gulf Itetwecn Pcrnia and Arabia. Perth ; an old and fine city of Scotland, on the Tiiy. P<*>rti' ; a rich country tin the wcHtern nidtt of South America Pe-»haV.er ; a large city of Cabul. Penth ; the l{ir;:r«»nt city of Hungary, adjoining to Duda. Pe'-ter»-bnrg ; the cnpitnl of the llusnian empire. Phil-a-der-phia ; the oupital of PennsylTAni.i. Phil -ip-pine lalnndn , a Inrgc group in the ChincMC set. Phi'1-ips-burg ; a town mid fortrcm of the duchy of Haden. Ptice>ni'.ci-a ; an ancient country, now included in Syria. Pin-cc'n-xa ; a ducliy and city of Italy, attached to Parma. Pi'c-ar-dy ; a ftirmer province of France, in the north. Pie'd-mont; a country of ItAly, now a province of SardiniA. Pi'-wi (pron. Pee'-XA) ; An Ancient town of Tuscany. Pit'cnirn'<« iNland ; a small island in the Pacific, lately pcopKta, I<,a; a grcnt river of South America, giving name ti An important new state. Pla'-t«-a;; a famous town of llcrotin, in Ancient Greece Ply'-mouth ; a very great port and naval arsenal in the wcm of England. Vo ; a large river in northern Italy. Poic-to'u (pron. Poi-too'); a former province In the Wi'»'t.«cn I ■ now duchy of PnisMinn IVjIand. r«>-to-Hi' ; a town of IVrii, witli rlcli hIImt nilnc^. riytH-dam ; « town mid castio of Uraiidciilmrg, in PrusKla. PritKiio ; tlio capital uf Dolicmiii. rriV-ton; a ImndNoim Tnnnufiicturinj? town in Lancnshirc. Trince Kdward hland , nn inland in the gulf of St. Law- rences formerly St. Joltn'ii. Trov-c^nce; a former province in ttic w>utli of Frnnce. IVo'v-i-denco; ft town and county of Ithode Inland, one of the United Stnten of America. Pru'-H-nia ; n con.«iideral)le kinjfdi»m of northern Europe. IV-tl)-li»; the larf^ent city in iMexico, next to the capital. l»u'-lo l*e-na'nff; un inland on the Strait of Malacca, called also Prince of VValcH* Inland. Pul-tou-a; a town of Uusnia, where Charles XII. was de- feated. Pyr-c-ne'es ; a lofty ridge of mountains which separaten Spain from Franco. Pyr-mont; a town of northern Germany, noted for its baths. (^ue-l)e'c ; the capital of Lower Canada. Quc'n-tin, St. ; a town of Pinirdy, where the Spaniards gained a great battle in l.l.'J?, now noted for manufactures. Qui'h-e-ron ; a peninsula of the western coast of France. (iui-lo'-tt ; a country and seaport of Zangucbar, in Africa. (iui'-to(pron. Ke'eto) ; a province and city in South America. (iuor-ra ; the name given to the river Niger, in the lower part of Its course. Ila'ah ; a strong town of liOwer ITun;?ary. Ha h-ha ; the chief town of NyHc, in central Africa. Ha'-ma ; an ancient town of Palestine. Ua'-mil-ics; a small town of Uelgiumi where Marlborough gained a famous victory in 1700*. Kan-goti-a-go) ; the largest of the Cape Verdu Islands. Saint John's ; the chief town of Newfoundland. Saint John's ; the principal seaport of New Brunswick. Sal-a-ma'n-ca ; an ancient town and university in Spain. Sa'1-a-mis; an island of Greece, near which a famous naval battle was anciently fought. Sa'-lis-bury ; an ancient city of England, with a splendid cu- thedral. Sa'-lem ; a seaport town of Massachusets. Sa-lc'e ; an ancient seaport town of Morocco. Sa'ltz-burg; an ancient city of Bavoria ; now Austrian. Sal-va-doV, St. ; the capital of Congo, in Africa. Sa-mar-ca'nd ; the former capital of Independent Tartary. Sa^moi-e'-da (pron. Sa-mo-e'da) ; a large country of Asiatic Russia, bordering on the Icy Ocean. Sa'-mos; an Island of the Archipelago, subject to Turkey. Sa-na ; the capital of Yemen, in Arabia. Sa'nd-wich Islands ; a group of Islands in the Pacific Ocean. San-san-di ng ; a flcr -'shing town in the centre of Africa. SaV.»-gos-M ; the v'.ief town of Arragon, in Spain. Vocabulary of Proper Names, 207 Sar-din-i-a ; a large island in the Mediterranean, giving name to a kingdom. Sa-vo'y ; a duchy, included in the kingdom of Sardinia. Sa'x-o-ny ; a kingdom, with several principalities, in Germany. Scha'ff-hau-sen ; a canton in Switzerland. Schcld ; the chief river of Belgium. Schn'm-la ; a large city, the strongest fortress of European Turkey. Sci'l-ly ; a cluster of islands and rocks off Cornwall. Sci'-o ; a fertile island of the Archipelago. Scotland ; the part of Great Britain north of the river Tweed. SeyUla ; celebrated rocks between Italy and Sicily. St'-baVtian, St. ; a strong seaport in the north of Spain. Se'ia Felix. hal Africa. la. imerica. id in the W. »rs. Europe. ;n Green- lipelago. >le basaltic ong castle Vocabulary of Proper Names. 209 a. an. nd, on tlic indostfin. I Wales. rope. and Ger- d. icluded iu Ta'-ble Mountain ; an elevation near the Cape of Good Hope. Ta-gus; a river of Spain and Portugal, which passes by Lisbon. Tah-ta-ry, or Tartary ; a very large portion of central Asia. Ta'-la-ve-ra J a town of Spain, where Wellington gained a great battle. Ta'n-gier ; a sea-port town of Fez, in Morocco. Te-he-ra'n (pron. Teh-he-ra un) ; the present capital of western Persia. Tan-jo're ; a province and city on the Coromandel coast. Ta-ra'n-to ; a sea-port town of Naples. Tar-a-go'-na ; a city and sea-port of Catalonia, in Spain. Ta't-ta ; a large city of Sinde, in western Hindostan. Tau'-ris, or Te-briz ; a considerable town in western Persia. Tau'-rus ; a vast chain of mountains between the Mediterra. nean and Caspian Seas. Tchad ; a very extensive lake in Bornou. Te'f-flis ; the capital of Georgia, in Asiatic Russia. Te'-ne-dos; a celebrated island in the Archipelago. Te'n-e-rifFe ; one of t^-e Canary Islands, with a very lofty peak. Ten-nes-see ; one of the United States of North America. Ter-cei'-ra ; one of the Azores, or Western Islands. Ter-na'te ; one of the Molucca Islands. Ter-ra del Fu-e'-go ; the southern extremity of America, le'r-ra Fi'rma, now Co-lom-bi-a; a large country in the north of South America. Thames ; a large navigable river which rises in Gloucestershire, and flows, through London, into the North Sea. Thebes, or Lux'or ; an ancient city of Upper Egypt, on the site of whicl here are most magnificent ruins. Thi-bet (pron. Ti'bet) ; a kingdom of Chinese Tartary. Thi-on-ville (pron. Te-on-vee'le) ; a city in the* N. E. of France. Thu-ri n-gi-a ; a district of Germany, annexed to Prussia. Ti'-ber ; a river of Italy, which passes by Rome. Ti'-gris ; a celebrated river in Asiatic Tiu-key, which falls into the Euphrates. Timbuctoo; a great town on the Niger. Ti'n~i-an; the finest of the Ladrone Islands. Ti-vo li ; an ancient and beautiful town of Roman Italy. To-ba'-go ; one of the British Caribbee Islands, To-bo'lsk ; the capital of Siberia. To-c'at ; a large city of Asiatic Turkey. To-ka'y ; a town of Upper Hungary, noted for its wines. To-le'-do ; an ancient town of New Castile, in Spain I ! 210 Vocabulary of Proper Names. Tomsk ; a province and large town of Asiatic Turkey. Ton-ga-ta-bo'o ; one of the Friendly Islands. Ton-qui'n or Ton-ki'n ; a kingdom annexed to Cochin- China. ToV-ne-a ; a town oi Bothnia ; now llussian. Tou'-lon ; the chief naval station in the south of France. Tou-lo'use (pron. Too-Io'oz) ; a city in the south of France. Tran-que-ba'r ; a town on the Coromandel coast, belonging to Denmark. Tran-syl-va'-ni -a ; a country of Europe, annexed to Hungary. Tra- van-core ; a small kingdom of southern India. Tre'-bi-sond ; an ancient and large seaport of Asiatic Turkey. Trent; an Austrian city, south of tho Tyrol. Trent; a large river in the centre of England. Treves (pron. Trave) ; an ancient city on the Rhine. Tri-este ; an ancient seaport town of Istria. Trin-co-ma-1^ ; a large harbour in the island of Ceylon. Tri'n-i-dad ; the southernmost of the Caribbee Islands. Tri'p-o-li ; a city and pachalic of Asiatic Turkey. Tri'p-o-li ; one of the Barbary States, in Africa. Tri'p-o-liz-za ; the late Turkbh capital of the Morea. Troy ; the capital of Troas, in Asia-minor, now no more. Troycs; a large and commercial city of France, on the Seine. Tsi-om-pa; a province annexed to Cochin-China. Tu'-nis; one of the chief states of northern Africa. Tu'r-key ; the dominions of the Grand Seignior. Tu'r-in ; a fine city, capital of Piedmont. Tu's-ca-ny , a considerable state of Italy. Tweed ; a la^ge river that separates England from Scotland. Tyne ; a large river of England, passing by Newcastle. Tyre ; an ancient sea-port town of Syria, now Sour. Ty-rol ; a mountainous province of the Austrian Empire. Va-la'is ; a canton of Switzerland, Val-la'd-o-lid ; a large ancient city of Spain. Va-le'n-ci-a ; a fertile province and city in the east of Spain. Va-le'n-ci-en-nes; a strong town in the north of France. Val-pa-rais-o ; the principal sea-port of Chili. Van-Dieren4 an island in Zealand. Wales ; a picturesque part of the island of Great Britain, con- taining twelve counties. Wal-la^-chi-a ; a province of Turkey in Europe. Wa'r-saw ; Mie capital of Poland. Wash-iiig-ton ; the capital of the United States of America. Wa-ter-ford ; a large city and seaport in the south of Ireland. Wa-ter-loo ; a village near Brussels, famoui for tlie battle gained by the Duke of Wellington in 1815 Wa-wa'; a large town of interior Africa, near the Niger. We'i-mar; a grand du-i-hy of Upper Saxony. Whi-dah ; a country of Guinea in western Africa. White Sea ; a gulf of the Arctic Ocean, in Russia. Wi'-burg (properly Vy-borg); a town in Finland. Wigh' • a beautiful island in the English channel. Wil-U-am, Fort ; the fort of Calcutta, in Bengal, i. 2i2 Vocabulary of Proper Names, ^ Wi1-na ; the capital of Lithuania, in Polish Russia. Win-ches-tcr ; an ancient city in the south of England. WimUsor ; a beautiful town of Knglaiidi where the king usu- ally resides. ArVindward Islands ; the Eastern Antillas, or West Indian Isles, so called from first receiving the trade-wind. The isles to the west are the Leeward Islands. Wirtemburg ; a kingdom in Germany. Wol-fen-bu't-tel ; a considerable town of Brunswick. Wor-ces-ter ; a fine ancient city in the west of England. •- Wu'rz'burg ; a district and city of Bavaria. YaV-kund ; the largest commercial city of Chinese Tartary. Yar>ri'-ba ; a large and fertile country of Africa, along tht Niger. Ye-niVci ; a large river of Siberia. Ye'-ni-seisk ; a town on its banks. ^ York ; an ancient city in the north of England. York ; the capital of Upper Canada. You'-ri ; a fertile country and large city of Africa, ow the Niger, IT -pres ; a strong town of Flanders. Za'a-ra, or Sa-ha-ra ; a vast sandy desert in the centre of Africa. Za'-gos-hi ; a very fertile island in the x*^iger. Zaim-bre ; a large lake of Congo. Za'-ire; a large river of Congo, in Africa. Zan-gue-ba'r ; a lorge country of Eastern Africa. Zante ; one of the Ionian Islands, famous for currants. Zan-zi-ba'r ; an island on the eastern coast of Africa. Za'-ri-a ; a large city, capital of Zegzeg, in central Africa. Zealand ; the largest isle of Denmark. Ze'a-land, New ; two large and fine islands in the Pucific, \n- habited by a savage people. Ze'e-land ; a province of the Dutch Netherlands. Ze'g'teg ; a very fruitful country of Houssa, in central Africat Znay'm ; a circle of Austria. Zu'rich ; a lake, canton, and city of Switierland. Zu'y-der-zee ; a great gulf of the Dutch Netherlands. THE END. London : Printed b) A. Spottiswoodi, New-btreet- Square. o 30, Patbrnostkr Row, April 1840. o Catalogue OF WORKS ON HISTORY, GEOGRAPHY, Arithmetic, EncUsb di French Qraanmars, RELIGIOUS WORKS, And Works on Natural History, Sgc, 8UITABLB FOR IiADIES' SCHOOLS * JUNIOR BOYS' SCHOOLS, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN, ORME, AND CO. » IJISTORICAL and MISCELLANEOUS QUES- ^^ TIONS, for the Use of Younff People ; with a Selection of British and General Biography. By R. Manonall. New Edi- tion, with the Author's last Corrections and Additions, and other very considerable recent Improvements, 12mo. 48.6d. bound. By the same Authoress, A COMPENDIUM of GEOGRAPHY; with Geogrraphic Exercises : for the Use of Schools, Private Fami- lies, &c. 4th Edit. 12mo. 7s. 6d. bound. QUESTIONS on the llISTORY of EUROPE : a Sequel to ManfnialPs Historical Questions ; comprising Questions on the History of the Nations of Continental Europe, not comprehended in that work. By Julia Corner. 2d Edit. 12mo. Sa. bound and lettered. \ TREATISE on ARITHMETIC. By D. ■^ Lardnkr, LL.D. F.R.S. 1 vol. fcp. 8vo. with Vignette Title, 6s. cloth lettered. A TREATISE on ASTRONOMY. By Sir John -^ Herschel. New Edit. 1 vol. fcp. g,o. with Vignette Title, 68. cloth. 4 SYSTEM of PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC, -^ applicable to the Present State of Trade and Money Trans- actions ; illustrated by numerous Examples under each Rule. By the Rev. J. Joyce. New Edition, corrected and improved by 3. Maynard, 12mo. 3s. bound. KEY to the above; containing Solutions and Answers to uil the Questions in the work. To which are added, Appendirps, Hhewinsi^ the Method of nuking Mental Calculations, and a \ew Mode of Setting Sums in the early Rules of Arithme- tic. New Edit, corrected and enlarged by 8. Maynard, 18mo. 3e. bound. o o — 2 Works for Ladies ^ Junior Boys* Schools* AN INTRODUCTION to the THEORY and -^ PRACTICKofPLANEandSPHEniCALTRICJONOMETRY, and the STEKKOOKAPHIC PROJECTION of the 8PHERE; including the Theory of Navigation : conipreheiidinf( a variety of Rulea, ForinulR'. &c. with their Practical Applications to the Meniurationof Heiffhtsand Distances ; todcteriiiiiie the Latitude by two Altitudes of the 8un« the Longitude by the Lunar Observa- tions, and to other iniiiortant l*roblenis on the Suliere, and on Nautical Astronomy. Uy Thomas Keith. 7th Edit, corrected by S. Maynaro, 8vo. 14s. cloth. By the same Author, THE ELEMENTS of PLANE GEOMETRY: containing the first Six Books of Euclid. From the text of Dr. Simson ; with Notes, Critical and Explanatory. To which are added, Book 7, including several im|M)rtant propositions which are not in Euclid ; toj^^ether with the Quadrature of the Circle, the Lune of llypocrates, the Maxima and Minima of Cieu- metrical Quantities, Sic. ; and Book 8, conMistin^- of Practical Geometry : also Book 9, of Planes and their Intersections ; and Book 10, of the Geometry of Solids. 4th Edition, corrected by S. Maynaro, 8vo. 10s. 6u. boards. A NEW TREATISE on the Use of the GLOBES ; or, a Philosophical View of the Earth and Heavens : comprehend ingf'an account of the figure, mag^nitude.and motion of the Earth ; with the natural changes of its surface, caused by Floods, I'^rth- quakes, &c. to^jrether with the Principles of Meteorolojfv and Astronomy ; with the Theory of Tides, &c. Preceded by an extensive selection of Astronomical and other Definitions, &c. &c. New Edit, considerably improved, by J. Rowbotham, F.R.A.S. lamo. with 7 Plates, price Gs. 6d. bound. *»* In this edition are introduced many new questions relat- infc to the positions of the Sun, Moon, and Planets, for the years 18S8, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, respectively. KEV, by Prior, 2:^. 6d. cloth. CTUDENT'S MANUAL; or, an Appmcliis-fi to ^ the English Dictionaries: beinjj an Etymolojfical and ¥.\- Klanatory \ocabulary of Words derived from tholiKEEK. By . 11. Black, LL.D. New Edit. I8mo. 2s. . I'imo. 3s. 6d. bound. T ECTEIIR FRANCOIS; ou, Recueil de Pieces, ^ en l*rose et en Vers, tirees des meilleurs Ecrivains, pour servir a perfectionner les Jeunes Gens dans la Lecteur ; a ^tendre I leur Connoissunce de la Lang; ue Framjoise; eta leur inculquer I des Principes de Vertu et de Pietti. 12mo. 5s. bound. & o o ~0 4 IVorksfor lAidies ^ Junior Uoyn Svhooh, Ltndlry MiTRRAY*! WoRKi-contitiurd. A HANDSOMi: I.IBRARY EDITION of tlio -^ GKAMMAK, together with the Kxercisei ami Key. 3 voU. 8vo. ail. boards. LMRST LKSSOXS in ENGLISH GRAMMAR, -•• adapted to tho raparitiev of (*hildrfn from Six to IVn Yt'arM Dusit^nedaa an Introduction to the Abridf^niiMit of Murray'! 18mo. tfd. Bitwed. OKI. Grammar. GRAMMATICAL QUESTIONS, adapted to the ^^ Grammar of Lindley Murray, with NotPi. Hy C. Hkadlky, A.M. Hth ICdit. impro>cd, 12mo. 2». 6d. bound. THE ^ Intr O HOOK of MONOSYLLABLES; or, nn tro. 4m. bound. PRONOLNCING EXPOSITOR; or, a New SuellinK'-Hook : in which the divisible Words are divided agreea- bly to the plan recommended by Drs. Lowth and Ash, and mo- nounced and explained chiefly after the manner of Walker, Browne, Jones, &c. New Edition, much improved, 12nio. 2s. bd. ENCiLISH EXERCISES, Oithoj;ra|.lncal and Grammatical; beinir a Selection of Choice Pieces, in Prose and Verse: with many Orin^inal Reflections, &c. desij;ned t(» improve the Juvenile Mind in Spelling and Grammar. New Edition, 18mo. Is. bound. SHORT (UlAMMAR of the ExNGLISH LANGUAGE. New Edition, l2mo. 2s. bound. THE NEW PANTHEON: or, an Introdnclion -* to the Mvtholojfy of the Ancients, in Question and Answer : compiled for the Use of Younjf Persons. To which are added, an Accentuated Index, Questions for Exercise, and Poetical Illustrationsof Grecian Mytholo>j;y, from Ilomerainl Virj^il. Ity W. J. HuuT. New Edition, coiiMidfrably enlarj3:»'. the late Uiiibop ot Lichfield and Coventry, lath Edition, 8vo. 9s. bds. PRRrACK. In the prrisent edition the author has mad(> nome vnry iin- finrtRntndditionM, chiefly in the modern part. whirU the alteration n the c<>nHU« of different couutrie*, efi|>eciaily of (jreat Britain, made re(|iiiMite. He has endeavoured to cond(*nH(< a i^reat quan- tity of matter, derived from scattered but intercstiiif^ documents, into as small a compass as might be consistent with perspicuity, without altcriufc the nature of an clfmantary treatise ; it being his object to give the most comprehensive general information in his power, and to leave minuter detiiils to more extensive works. By the same Author, AN ATLAS of MODERN GEOGRAPHY: rauNisting of Twenty-three Coloured Maps, from a new set of Plates ; corrected, with a complete Index. 8vo. IQs. half-bound. AN ATLAS of ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY: consisting of Twenty-two Coloured Maps; with a complete Accentuated Index. 8vo. 12s. half-bound. A GENERAL ATLAS of ANCIENT and MODERN OKOGRAPHY; consisting of Forty-flve Coloured Maps, and two Indexes. 4to. 24s. half-bound. %* The Latitude and Longitude are given in the Indexes to these Atlases. nUTLINE GEOGRAPHICAL COPY BOOKS ^ (Ancient and Modern); with the Lines of Latitude and Lon- gitude only. Intended as Practical Exercises for the Pupil to nil up, aiuf designed to accompany the above. 4to. each 4s. ; or 7s. 6d. together. AN ABRinr.MENT of BP. BUTLER'S ^ MODKRX and ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY: arranged in the form of Question and Answer, for the Use or Beginners. By Mary Cunningham. 2d Edition, fcp. Svo. 28- cloth lettered. P LEMENTS of MYTHOLOGY ; or, an Eiisy and ^^ Concise History of the Pagan Deities; intended to enable the young reader to nnderstanifthe Ancient Writers of Greece and Rome. By R. Valpy, D.D. 7th Edition, 18mo. 2s. bound. POETICAL CHRONOLOGY of ANCIENT and ^ ENGLISH HISTORY; with Historical and Explanatory Notes. By the late R. Valpy, D.D. New Edit. I2mo. 2s. 6d. cl. Q ^ m IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) // ^ *^> Works for Ladies* if JiJftior Boys* Schools, ^0^^*^t^^^^^^^^0^0^f^^^0^0m nRAMMAR of GENERAL GEOGRAPHY; ^^ beinfr an Introduction and Companion to the lar^^er Work of the same Author. By the Rev. J. Goldsmith. New Kdit. improved and corrected,* illustrated with Views of the principal Capitals of the World, a variety of Maps, &c. 18mo. 3s. 6d. bd.— KEY, 9d. Byihe 8anr;e Author, GEOGRAPHY on a POPULAR PLAN. New Edition, including^ Extracts firom recent Voyag^cs and Travels, with Eng^raving^s, representinff the Dresses, Customs, &c. of all Nations ; Views of Cities ; Maps, &c. 13mo. 148. bd* TNTRODUCTION to GOLDSMITH'S GEO- -■• GRAPHY. By J. Dowlino. 18mo. 9d. By the same Author, FIVE HUNDRED QUESTIONS on the MAPS in Goldsmith's Grammar of GeogT-aphy. 18mo. 9d.— KEY, 9d. n EOGRAPHY for YOUTH. By the Rev. J. ^^ Uartlby. 7th Edit. 12mo. 48. 6d. bouiid. By the same Author, OUTLINES of GEOGRAPHY. The First Coarse for Children. 9th Edit. I8mo. 9d. THE ARITHMETICIAN'S GUIDE; or, a -*■ Complete Exercise Book, for Public Schools and Private Teachers. By W.Taylor. 12mo. 28. 6d. bound. A KEY to the same. By W. H. White, of the Commercial and Mathematical School, Bedford. 12mo. 4s. bd. A N INTRODUCTION to PRACTICAL ARITH- -^ MBTIC, in Two Parts ; with various Notes and occasional Directions, for the Use of Learners. By T. Molinbux, many years Teacher of Accounts and»the Mathematics in Macclesfield. In 12mo. Part 1. 15th Edit. 28. 6d. bd. : Part II. 5th Edit. 28. 6d. bd.— KEYS to both Parts, price 6d. each, sewed. T EMPRIERE'S CLASSICAL DICTIONARY, ^ abridged fh>m Anthon's and Barker's. By E. H. Barker, of Trinity College, Cambridge. 2d Edition, for public and pri- vate schools of both sexes, post 8vo. 8s. 6d. bound. This is the only edition for public and private schools of both sexes, containing^ every article divested of all indelicacy. o -o o €1 ia Works for Ladies tf Junior Boys* Schools. 7 t rk it. »al els. al J. AN ABRIDGMENT of UNIVERSAL HIS- ^ TORY, adapted to the Use of Families and Schools ; with appropriate Questions at the end ot each Section. By the Rev. H. J. KNAPP, M.A. New Edition, with considerable Additions, 12nio. 5i. bound. pOETRY for CHILDREN ; consisting? of Selec -^ tionsof easy and interesting Pieces from the best Poets, interspersed with Original Pieces. By Miss Aikin. New Edit. 18mo. 2s. half-bound. A TREATISE on PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC. ■^ By A. Nbsbit. 3d Edition, 12mo. 5s. bound. A KEY to the same, 12mo. 5s. bound. nR. NOEHDEN'S GERMAN GRAMMAR. ^ 8th Edition, corrected and revised, by the Rev. C. H. F. BiALLOBLOTZKV, Ph. D.. German Master to the City of London School, Sic. 12mo. 8s. has. DR. NOEHDEN»S EXERCISES for WRIT- ING GERMAN according to the Rules of Grammar. 6th Edition, 12mo. 8s. bds.— KEY7by J. R. ScHULTZ,4th Edition, corrected, 12mo. 3s. 6d. bds. RABENHORSrS POCKET DICTIONARY of the GERMAN and ENGLISH LANGUAGE. 5th Edition, materially improved, by D. Boilbau, pocket size, 12s. bd» THE LINGUIST ; a Complete Course of Instriic- tions in the GERMAN LANGUAGE; in which attention is particularly directed to peculiarities in Grammatical Forms and Construction. Exemplified by selections firom the best Authors. By D. Boilbau, Author of " The Nature and Genius of the German Language ;*' " Key to the German Language and Con- versation," &c. Ice. New Edition, carefully revised and cor- rected, 1 vol. 12mo. 78. cloth. 1 NEW UNIVERSAL FRENCH GRAMMAR; -^ being an accurate System of French Accidence and Syntax. By N. Hambl. New Edition, greatly improved, l2mo. 4s. bound. By the same Author, GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES. New Edition. 12mo. 48.— KEY, 12mo. 3s.— QUESTIONS, with Key, 9d. sewed. o- w p 8 Works for Ladies* if Junior Boys* Schools. THE WORLD in MINIATURE ; containiiijr a -'- AdthAil Account of the Situmtion, Extent, Productions, OoTernment, Population. Manners, Curiosities. &c. of the dif- ferent Countries of the World. For Translation into French. By N. Hambl. New Edition, corrected, lamo. 4t. 6d. bound. AN EXPLANATORY PRONOUNCING DIC- -^ TIONARYofthe FRENCH LANGUAGE, in French and Enirlish ; wherein the exact Sound of every Syllable is distinctly murked, according to the Method adopted by Mr. Walker, in his Pronouncing^ Dictionary. To which are prefixed the Principles of the French Pronunciation ; Prefatory Directions for using^ the Spelling Representative of every Sound ; and the Coi^ju^cation of toe Verba, Regfolar, Irregular, and Defective, with their true Pronunciation. By L'Abbe Tardy, late Master of Arts in the University of Pans. New Edition, carefully revised, 1 vol. 12mo. 6s. bound. MUGENT'S POCKET DICTIONARY of the ^^ FRENCH and ENGLISH LANGUAGES ; containing the followingr additions and improvements: — !. New Words in ifeneral use in eachLanffuace. 3. Examples and Phrases, to adlitate the readinr of Modem Writers. 8. Directions as to the Choice to be made of the French Word best adapted to ex- gress the idea of the writer or speaker. 4. Prepositions annexed > the French Verbs and Adyectives, shewing what case they fpvem. 9Sd Edition, carefiilly revised and arranged, by J . C. Tarvbr, French Master to Eton College, pocket size, 5s. 6d. bound. (OUTLINES of HISTORY, from the Earliest ^ Period to the Abdication of Napoleon. By Thomas Kbiohtlby, Esq. New Edition, corrected and considerably improved, 1 vol. Icp. 8vo. ds. cloth lettered. By the same Author, THE HISTORY of ENGLAND. 2 vols. 12mo. 148. cloth. *»* For the convenience of Schools, the volumes will always be sold separately. THE HISTORY of GREECE. 3d Edition, I vol. ]8mo. te. 6d. cloth. THE HISTORY of ROME. 3d Edition, 1 vol. 13mo. te. 6d. cloth. A TREATISE on the ARTS, MANUFACTURES, ^ MANNERS, and INSTITUTIONS of the GREEKS and ROMANS. By tne Rev. T. D Fosbrokr, &c. &c. a vols. fcp. 8vo. with Vignette Titles, 198. cloth lettered. fi o o Works far Ladies* ^ Junior Boys* Schools. 9 a ^0^^t^t^a0m^^0^0m0^0^^m^^0m AN INTRODUCTION to ENGLISH PARSING, -^ adapted to Murray's Orammar and Exercises. By A. Nbsbit. New Edition, 18mo. 28. 6d. bound. •n THE SCHOLARS SPELLING ASSISTANT, -^ wherein the Words are arranji^ed according to their principles of Accentuation. By T. Carpenter. New Edition, improved, 13nio. Is. 6d. bound. NOTICE.— TAe only Genuine and Complete Edition o/* Carpen- ter's Spelling iapubliahed hyMenen. Longman tf Co. andMeure, Whitlaker ^ . Co. Any person selling any other edition than the above if liable to action at law ; and on diecovery ivill be immediately proceeded against by Messrs. Longman ^ Co, THE CLASS-BOOK; or, 365 Readingr Lessons -*- for Schools of either Sex ; every Lesson havinfir a clearly defined object, and teaching some principle of Science or Morality, or some important Truth. By the Rev. D. Blai r. New Edition, 13mo. fts. bound. By the same Author, READING EXERCISES for SCHOOLS; beingf a Sequel to Mavor's Spelling, and an Introduction to the Class-Book. New Edition, corrected, 12mo. 38. bound. THE ENGLISH SPELLING-BOOK, '*- accompanied by a progfressi ve Series of easy and familiar Les- sons: intended as an Introduction to the Reading and Spelling of the Engflish Langfuare. By Dr. Mayor. 445tn Edition, with various revisions ana improvements of Dr. Mavor, leg^ally con- veyed to them by his assignment, with Frontispiece by Stothard, and 44 beautiful Wood Enfifravings, designed expressly for the work by Harvey. The whole printed in an entirely new type. 12mo. Is. 6d. bound. %* Messrs. Longman & Co. beg to acquaint Booksellers and Conductors of Schools, that the above is the only genuine edition of Mavor's Spelling. By the same Author, CLASSICAL ENGLISH POETRY, containing flrom Three to Four Hundred of the best Short Pieces in the Language. With a Preface, indicating the several Species of Poetry, and the best modes of Recitation. New Edition, 12mo. 5s. 6d. bound. 6 o -& « 10 Works for Ladies* ^ Junior Boys* Schools, A HISTORY of GREECE. By the Rev. Connop Thirlwall. 8 vols. fcp. 8vo. £2. 8t. %* The llrtt lix volumes only are yet published, price 3fls. ; the two remaining will be published with as little delay as {tot- sible. THE HISTORY of ROME. 2 vols. fcp. 8vo. with Vignttte Titles, 128. cloth lettered. THE CHRONOLOGYof HISTORY; contniiiin^ -^ Tables, Calculations, and Statements, indispensable for ascertaining the Dates of Historical Events, and of Public and Ptivate Documents, fh>m the earliest periods to the present time. By Sir Harris Nicolas, K.C.M.u. 3d Edition, corrected throughout, 1 vol. fcp. 8vo. Vignette Title, 6s. cloth lettered. A HISTORY of ihe FALL of the ROMAN ^ EMPIRE ; comprising a View of the Invasion and Settle- ment of the Barbarians. By J. C. L. Db Sismondi. 2 vols. fcp. 8vo. with Vignette Title, 12s. cloth lettered. ENCYCLOPEDIA of GEOGRAPHY; com- prising a Complete Description of the Earth, exhibiting its Relation to the Heavenly Bodies, its Physical Structure, the Natural History of each Country, and the Industry, Commerce, Political Institutions, and Civil and Social State of all Nations. By Hugh Murray, F.R.S.E. : assisted in Astronomy, &c. by Professor Wallace; Grology, &c. by Professor Jameson; Botany, ftc. by Sir W. J. Hooker ; Zoology, &c. by W. Swain- son, Esq. With 82 Maps, drawn by Sidney Hall, and upwards of 1000 other Engravings on Wood, from Drawings by swainson, T. Landseer, Sowerby, Strutt, &c., representing the most re- markable objects of Nature and Art in every Region of the Globe. Containing upwards of 1500 pages, 60s. ooards. " It is without a rival.**— Asiatic Journal. ** One of the most learned, accurate, and entertaining works on geography.**— Gbntlbm AN *8 Magazine. ILLUSTRATIONS of PRACTICAL MECHA- -■- NICS. By the Rev. H. Mobrlby, M.A., Professor of Na- tural Philosophy and Astronomy in King*s College, London; being the First Volume of lUvstrations of Science by the Pro- fessors of King*s College. I vol. fcp. 8vo. with numerous Wood- cuts, 8s. cloth lettered. » -0 Workftfor Ladies ^ Junior Boys* Schools. 1 1 a r)N FEMALE IMPROVEMENT. By Mrs. ^ John Sandfurd. 2(1 Edit. 1 vol. fcp. 8vo. 7i. 6d. cloth lettered. ** Mrs. Sandford's previous work entitles her name to respect, ond her present perforniance Htrenfrthens her claim to it. It is an ottering whicn her sex should receive with rratitude." Cx)URT Journal. ''Mrs. Sandford's observations appear to be the result of experience and mature reflection, and are distinguished by amiability and good sense, pervaded with a strong religioua feeling.**— Spbctator. By the same Authoress, WOMAN in her SOCIAL and DOMESTIC CHARACTER. 6th Edition, fcp. 8vo. 6s. cloth lettered. Contents.— Causes of Feii^ale Influence — Value of Letters to Woman— Importance of Religion to Woman — Christianity the Source of Female Excellence— Scripture Illustrative of Female Character — Female Influence on Religion— Female Defects— Female Romance— Female Education— Female Duties. " We coold wish to see these useful volumes in the hands of every young lady on her leaving school : they would aid greatly in the formation of character, m* correcting current mistakes of life, in invigorating the intellect, in refining and elevating the taste, and above all, in imparting a high tone of moral and reli- gious sentiment to the mind.**— Evangelical Magazine. " It is the smallest recompense we can make for the pleasure we have experienced from these inestimable volumes, to say that we do not know any works in the whole range of female literature that we could more honestly and cordially recommend as a Christmas present for a young lady.**— Scottish Guardian. PROGRESSIVE EDUCATION. Translated *• from the French of Madame Necker db Saussure, by Miss Holland. 2 vols. fcp. 8vo. las. cloth lettered. "The authoress comes boldly forward as an educational reformer to advocate the claims of early and progressive educa- tion on Christian principles ; and she expounds ner views with an acuteness and a cogency of argument, and inculcates them with an earnestness and vigour, and withal a gfraceful ease and familiarity of style, which carry the convictions and sympathies of her readers irresistibly along with her, and cannot fail to pro- duce a powerful impression upon the public mind. It is a remarkaole work, both as regards its intellectual and moral qualities, and is calculated to serve important purposes in the cause of education. To teachers and parents, and above all^ to mothers, we can cordially recommend it, as affording an im- pressive estimate of the solemn resijonsibility they incur in the education of the young, and containing many excellent rules for their guidance in the discharge of their important duties.** Scottish Guardian. « o 12 Works for Ladiet' If Junior Boy*' School*. r^^«^^^^% • THE PRINCIPLES of CHRISTIAN PHILO- ^ SOPHY: conUininir the Doctrines* Duties, Admonitions, and Consolations of the Christian Reliffion. Hy John Burns, M.D. F.R.S. RetriuH Professor of Surgery in the University of Olanfcow. 5th Rdition, I2mo. 7s. boards. CoNTSNTs.— Man is created for a Future State of Happiness— Of the means by which a Future State of Happiness is procured— Of what is required of Man that he may obtain a Future State of Happiness >Of the Nature of the Future Htate— Ofthe Preparation for the Future State-Of Personal Duties-Of Relative T)uties— Of the Duties Men owe to God— Of the Admonitions and Conso- lations afforded by the Christian Religion. CELECrWORKS of the BRITISH POETS, from ^-^ Den Jonson to Beattie; with Biographical and Critical Pre- faces. By Dr. Airin. 1 vol. 8vo. 18s. doth •, or neatly done up with gilt edm, 30s. " A compilation which places before us the best portions of our liest poets m a very accessible form, and in the selection of which we have the benefit of the sound taste and critical abilities of a gentleman so long and so usefully known to the world of letters as Dr. Aikin. The plan of the present volume is both compre- hensive and Jttdicioua."— Monthly Rrvikw. CELECT WORKS of the BRITISH POETS, from ^ Chaucer to Withers. With Biographical Sketches. By RoBRRT SoiTTHKT, LL.D. I vol. 8vo. uuiform with Aikin*s Poets, aOs. cloth; or with gilt edges, i^l. lis* 6d. FAMILY SHAKSPEARE: in which nothincr is *■ added to the Original Text, but those Words and Kxpres- sions are omitted whicn cannot with propriety be read aloud in a Family. Bv T. Bowdlkr. Esq. F.R.8. New F«dition, 1 large vol. 8vo. with S6 Illustrations after Smirke. Howard, &c. SOs. cloth ; with gilt edges, 81s. 6d. ; or in large type, without Illus- trations, 8 vola. 8vo. jer4. Hs. 6d. boards. CIR EDWARD SEAWARD»S NARRATIVE of ^ his SHIPWRECK, and conseouent Discovery of certain Islands in the Caribbean Sea : witn a detail of many extraor- dinary Events in his Life, from 1733 to 1749. RS written in his own Diary. Edited by Miaa Jan b Portrr. 2d Edition, 3 vola. small 6vo. 918. cloth. **The most curious and instructive work that has appeared since the firat dawn of discovery, and in the history of navi- gation."— Sprctator. ** Since the days of De Foe, there has not appeared so clever a fiction of its class.'*— Unitrd Srrvicr Journal. -0 o ff IVorktfor Ladies tf Junior Boijh Schools, 13 KIW BDITIONt or MRU. MAROBT*! CONVBRSATIONf. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY; in which the Elc mentfl of that Science are famitinrly explained, an^^-«»VVX'V fJONVERSATIONS on KOTANY. 8th Edition, ^ enUrired, 12roo. with 2a VAxgrmviu^s, U. 6<1. pUIn ; ISi. colourrd. SCHOOL BOTANY; or, an Introduction to ^^ Botany, for the Preparation of Students for the Matricu- lation Examination in tne Univeraity of London. Hy John LiNDLKY. Ph. 1). P.R.S. L.8. &c., ProfpMor of Hotany in the London Univemity Colleffp, and in the Royal limtitution. 1 vol. fcp. 8vo. with upwards of 100 Woodcuts, 6s. cloth lettered. By the same Author, INTRODUCTION to BOTANY. 2d Edition, with Corrections and considerable Additions, 1 lai^e vol. 8vo. with nomerous Plates and \^dcuts, 18s. cloth. ** We have no hesitation in pronounciufr the * Introduction to Botany,* by Dr. Lindley, to be the most valuable and perfect in any languafe we are acquainted with.**— Mriiical Oazkttc. ** The most valuable work of the kind in our lauKuaffe.** British and Forkion Mkoical Rkvikw. ** A work of classical excellence ; most accurate, instructive, and pleasing. It is essential for every boianist to have a copy of it beside hitn.**— Mkoico-Chiruruical Rkvikw. A NATURAL SYSTEM of BOTANY; or, a Systematic View of the Oriranization, Natural Affinities, and GeoH^raphical Distribution of the whole V«^-«>tablc Kin^rdoni: together with the Uses of the must ini|H)rtant Species in Medicine, the Arts, kc. ad Edition, with numerous Additions and ('or- rections, and a complete List of Genera, with their Synonyms, 1 vol . 8vo. 188. cloth. ARIENTAL CUSTOMS: applied to the Illiis. ^^ tration of the Sarred .Scriptures. By Samuel Burokr, A.M. &c. New Edit, with additions, 12mo. 8s. Gd. cloth lettered. ''The manners of the I^Uist, amidst all the changes of (govern- ment and relit^ioii, are still the same : they are living impressions fh>m an original mould : and at every Ktep Kome object, some idiom, some dress, or some custom of common life, reminds the traveller of ancient times : and confirms, above all, the beauty, the accuracy, and the propriety of the language and the history of the Bible.'*— Mori BR*s Skcund Juurnky thkuuuh Persia. Co.VTBNTS.— Chap. 1. Houses and Tents. —2. Marriage.— .3. Chil- dren.— 4. Servants.— 5. Food and Drink.— 6. DreKs and Clothing. — 7. Presents and Visit ug.— 8. Amusements.— 9. Hooks and Let- terrt.— 10. Hospitality.— 11. Travelling.— 12. Respect and Honour. —IS. Agriculture.- 14. Cattle and iJeaats.- 15. Birds, Insects, and Reptiles.— 16. Fruit and Wine.— 17. Kings and Government. —18. War.- 19. Punishments.- 20. Religion.— 21. Time and Sea- sons.— 22. Medicine.— 28. Funerals. — 24. Miscellaneous. o o a- Works /or Ladies tf Junior Boys* Schools. \6 na THE SACRED HISTORY of the WORLD; *■ phitotophlcally conslderml In • Herlct of I^ettera to a Son. llyHiiAHoN TuRMKii, Esq. F.S.A. and K.A.S.L. a volt. 8Y0. d, 2. at. boards. ..^ NVW EDITIONS OF MAUNDIl'S TRBAIURIBS. 1. THE BIOGRAPHIC ALTREASURY; coiimh iiiflr ^ of McmoirM, Hkctches, or Hrief Notices of the Lives of about 12,000 Kuiinent Fcrsons, of all AfC^s and Nations, from the Eftrliest Period of Hiittory to the Present Time: forniinr a New and (Complete Dictionary of Universal Bioffraphv. The whole surrounded with Precepts and M^ims, ori^nal and selected, ad Kditiun, with Addenda, 1 vol. fcp. 8vo. 8s. 6d. cloth; 10s. 6d. roan, gilt edges. ** The author possesses in an eminent degree the qnaliflcations f(ir producing excellent works of this kind. Labour, industry, and carefulness, are their only genuine sources t and when to these are su|)eradded an impartial mind, sound judirment, and good abilities, we find the results to be such publications as the ^Tretuury of Knowledge ^^ and this * Bioffraphical Tretuury.^ " LlTKRARY GaZ£TTB. 2. THE TREASURY of KNOWLEDGE, and ^ LIHRARY of REFERENCE; in Two Parts. Part \, being a New and Enlarged Dictionakv of the English Lanouaor. containing many Signiflcanb and Useful AVords in Science and Art, selected from Modern Authors of repute, and which are not to be found in any other lexicographical work: preceded by a Compendious Kng:lish Grammar, with Verbal Distinctions, classed and Illustrated ; Proverbs, Terms, and Phrases, from the French, Italian, and Spanish, translatefl. &c. Part U. comprising a Nkw Universal Gazetteer, clerived from the Latest Authori- ties, with Population and other Tables; a Compendious Classical Dictionary; Scripture Proper Names, accented; a Chronological Analysis of General History; a Dictionary of Law Terms, Ike. &c. &c. The whole surrounded by Moral Maxims and Proverbial Aphorisms, the Experience of the Past, and a Guide for the Future. 10th Edition, 1 vol. fcp. 8s. 6d. cloth ; 10s. 6d. roan, gilt edges. 3. THE SCIENTIFIC aud LITERARY TREA- -■- SURY : a New and Popular Dictionary of the Belles-Lettres j embracing every subject of interest alluded toby Ancient Authors ; together with the Discoveries and Inventions of Modern Times. Ihe whole treated in a Familiar Style; and every Page of the work surrounded by Facts, Maxims, or Kemarks illustrative of the Fact. 1 vol. fcp. 8vo.— A'eaWy ready. o o 16 IVorkifor L(uii§»* if Junior Boy»* Schooit. UISTOHY of ENGLAND from the EARLIEST ^^ PBRIOD to the DKATII of BLIZADKTH. Hy Sharon Tvbn«m»Km|. V.A.S. R.A.D.L. Itc. letteml. 19 volt. Svo. ^tH. U. rloth The ftbove may alio lie had in th« Aillowinf leparete portlona t— HitToiiY or THR Anolo-Saxoni \ compriiinf the History of Rnfland fToro the Rarliett Period to the Nonnen Conqucit. ftth Bdit. S volt. 8V0. jfa. fli. HirroKY ow Bnoland durino thr MiddlrAori} com- prUiny the Reifne Arom WilUam the Conqueror to the Rcreaeion of Henry VIII. ; and alio the llietory of the Literature, Poetry, Rellf ion. the IVorreit of the Reformation and of the Lanynaye during that Period. Stl Kdit. 5 vole. 8vo. ^es. boards. History or THR Rkion or Hrnry VIII.; comprising the Political History of the commencement of the Rngli»h Reforma- tion I being the First Part of the Modem History of England. 9d Kditlon, 9 vols. 8vo. 26s. boards. History or thr Rrions or Rdward VI. Mary, and Blizarrth t being the Hecond Part of the Modern History of England. 9d Edit. 9 vols. 8vo. 89s. DOMESTIC DUTIES ; or, Inalructions to Younjf Married Lailies on the Management of their Households, &c. ftc. By Mrs. William Parkks. 4th Edition, 12mo. 10s. 6d. cloth lettered. "The volume before ns is one of those practical works which are of real value and utility. It is a perfect vadk-mkcum for the young married lady, who may resort to it on all questions of household economy and etiquette. There is nothing omitted with which it behoves a young lady to be acquainted."— Nkw Monthly Mao. THE BRITISH FLORA ; compriKitifir ibe Flower- ing Planta and the Ferns. By 8ir William Jackson HooKKR, K.H. LL.D. Regius Professor of Hotany in the Univer- sity of Glasfrow, ftc. 8vo. 4th Edit, with Plates, containing 89 Figures, illustrativo of the Grasses and Umbelliferous Plants, 12s. i or coloured, 16s. %* In this edition all the newly-discovered Species are intro- duced. The Unnsan arrangement is followed in the bodv of the work ; but in the Appendix are given the Characters of all the Natural Orders, with a List of the Genera, referring to the pages where they are described. Wilson 8i Ogilvy, 57, Skinner Street, Snowhill, London. o >tt. LI EST 8MAIION !•. doth Dn«t— liitory of unqucit. ■ ; com- icrrtMion , Toetry, Mngtukft iiing the iteforma- BnglADd. lY. AND istory of Y'ounjf iseholdi, 1, laroo. (■ which M for the itioni of omitted "— Nkw Flower- Fackson } Univer- >nt»iningf ■ Plants, re intro- dy of the >f all the ;be pages Ion. Of ■' ^":3^-